Home

Schneider Electric Processor Adapter User's Manual

1. Procedure Mounting the Step Action Assembled 3 Push the assembled adapters onto the base gently pressing the locking tabs Adapters on an inward I O Base Continued Snap 1 shown in the illustration below will not align properly with the mating slot in the I O base unless the Option Adapter is placed straight onto the base Do not attach just one latch and rotate the Option Adapter onto the I O base Result The locking tabs on each side of the Option Adapter slide inside the I O base and out through the locking slot The 12 pin connectors on the two units are mated to each other in the process 4 Apply slight pressure to the top of the stirrup on the back of the Option Adapter so that it snaps into place on the bottom of the I O base 100 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Assembling Momentum Components Disassembling a Module with an Option Adapter Overview Tools Required The three tiered assembly is designed to fit together tightly so it can withstand shock and vibration in an operating environment This section contains two procedures Removing the assembled adapters from the I O base Removing the Option Adapter from the Processor Flat head screwdriver Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 101 Assembling Momentum Components Disassembling a Module with an Option Adapter Continued Procedure Follow the steps in the table b
2. For This Topic See Section On Page Configuring the Processor Adapter 1 206 Configuring Option Adapter Features 2 223 Modifying Communication Port Parameters 3 232 I O Mapping the Local I O Points 4 242 870 USE 101 10 V 2 205 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Section 8 1 Configuring the Processor Adapter Overview Purpose In This Section This section describes how to configure a Momentum M1 Processor Adapter using Modsotft 2 6 This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Selecting an M1 Processor Adapter 207 Specifying an M1 Processor Type 210 Default Configuration Parameters 212 Changing the Range of Discrete and Register References 215 Changing the Size of Your Application Logic Space 217 Changing the Number of Segments 218 Changing the Size of the I O Map 220 Establishing Configuration Extension Memory 222 206 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Selecting an M1 Processor Adapter Introduction This section describes how to select an M1 Processor Adapter with Modsoft 2 6 starting from the Configuration Overview editor cr Note For a full description of how to use Modsoft 2 6 refer to Modicon Modsoft Programmer Software V 2 6 User Guide 890 USE 115 00 Procedure Follow the steps below to select an M1 Processor Adapter Step Action 1
3. For custom cabling use Cat 5 4 Twisted Pair Ethernet Cable AWG 26 It may be shielded or unshielded Shielded cable is recommended for long runs and for noisy environments You may use stranded or unstranded cable Keep in mind that stranded cable is more flexible Vendors include Vendor Part for Shielded Cable Part for Unshielded Cable Belden 1633A 1583A non plenum 1585A plenum Berk Tek 530131 540022 Hipernet Cat 5 UTP LSZH rated cable Alcatel Cable Net Schneider Automation provides a crimping tool 490 NAB 000 10 and an RJ45 die set 170 XTS 023 00 to attach the 170 XTS 022 00 connector to the cable 870 USE 101 10 V 2 131 Using the Modbus Ports Connectors for Modbus RS485 Networks Overview RJ45 Connector g This section describes the connectors which should be used in constructing an RS485 network for Momentum components This connector is used with the RS485 port on the 172 JNN 210 32 Option Adapter Description Part Number Illustration Modbus RS485 Connector T 170 XTS 041 00 RJ45 base l iq DB9 Connector g This connector is used with the RS485 port on the Processor Adapters Description Part Number Illustration Modbus RS485 Connector T 170 XTS 040 00 DB9 base a SCHNEIDER AUTOMATION INC a ae Bid Continued on next page 132
4. Overview Purpose This section uses an example to explain how to configure a Modbus Plus network for I O servicing In this example a CPU will control four Momentum I O modules In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Devices on the Network 264 Defining the Link and Accessing a Node 265 Confirming the Peer Cop Summary Information 268 Specifying References for Input Data 272 Accessing the Remaining Devices 276 Completing the I O Device Configuration in Peer Cop 278 870 USE 101 10 V 2 263 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Devices on the Network Introduction This section describes the five devices which comprise the sample network and the strategy used to assign addresses The Network The following table lists the Modbus Plus address and components of each Devices Momentum module on the network Modbus Plus I O Base Type Adapter Type Address 1 type not specified M1 Processor Adapter type not specified 172 PNN 210 22 Modbus Plus Option Adapter 2 170 ADI 340 00 170 PNT 110 20 16 point input Modbus Plus Communication Adapter 3 170 ADO 340 00 170 PNT 110 20 16 point output Modbus Plus Communication Adapter 4 170 ADI 350 00 170 PNT 110 20 32 point input Modbus Plus Communication Adapter 5 170 ADO 350 00 170 PNT 110 20 32 point output Modbus Plus Communication Adapter Address In this type of architecture ass
5. Click on the button under the Module heading Result A list of module types is displayed including I OBus modules identified by code number a list of codes is provided at the end of this section I O Module Selection AAI 030 00 AEC 920 AAI 140 0 BNO 6x1 00 rPrerrry COOO00G PDP Bests GDOOCCOCCCoOo y O SPrEerrrrrrs PEPER OooO0oG O00000 DVV eeeee ANNNANAnNANAAHRSOr 295555559585 SSOSSS55O DUV ODDO Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 365 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Concept Editing the l OBus I O Map Continued Procedure Continued Generic InterBus Module Identifier Codes Step Action 2 Click on the desired model number and then click the lt OK gt button Result The module type and its description are displayed on the Remote I O Bus Drop screen The proper field is enabled so that you can assign state RAM reference s to the unit 3 Enter the desired reference number Where there is more than one register the balance is automatically assigned 4 Continue to select and map modules one after the other You must enter the modules in contiguous node slots on the screen e g you cannot enter a module in slot 7 if you have not filled slot 6 InterBus device manufacturers embed an identifier code in their network slave modules in conformance with InterBus standards The code identifies a device by its I O type but not its specific model
6. 0cceeeeseeeeeeees 250 Editing the I OBUS I O Map eeeecceeeeeeeceeseeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseaeeeaeeteaeeeneeeeatens 252 X 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Contents Chapter 10 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Modsoft With PEGE COD sisirin rebsneeancb umn Caaan iN iaat RREN EAEE 257 Section 10 1 Getting Stamed 22 55 a eaaa a eee a a r aeaa e eai 258 OLEATE E E E E EE E E i ed E E ed ane 258 Accessing the Peer Cop Configuration Extension Screen cecseeeee 259 The Default Peer Cop Screen ou eeceeeeeescceseeeeeceseeeeeaeeeeeeteaeeeseeseaeessaeeeaeeeaees 261 Section 10 2 Using Modbus Plus to Handle W O ou eeceeseeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeaeeseeeesneeeeneenaees 263 OVEIVIEW 22 4 heen Hie ee echt iver Get adel Oona T 263 Devices on the Network cccesceecseseeeeseceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseseaseneasenensneeenseetens 264 Defining the Link and Accessing a Node ceeseeeseeeeteneeeeeentereeneeeteneeees 265 Confirming the Peer Cop Summary Information sccecceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 268 Specifying References for Input Data 0 e cc eeeeceeeneeeeeeeeereteaeseeeeneeeeaeeeeeete 272 Accessing the Remaining Devices eeeeesceeesneeeeneeteneeeeeaneeteneeeeenaeeeee 276 Completing the I O Device Configuration in Peer Cop e eeeeeseeeseeeteeees 278 Section 10 3 Passing Supervisory Data over Modbus PluS cccseceesesteeeeeteeeeeneeeees 281 OVEIVIEW 2 3 2hhilee AEE lit eee ML
7. LED Status Function Start up Both Single flash Indicates good health RUN Green On continuously when the CPU has received power and is solving logic Flashes an error pattern if the CPU is in kernel mode See Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes on page 417 Off CPU is not powered up or is not solving logic COM ACT Green May be on continuously or blinking Indicates activity on Modbus port 1 Off No activity on Modbus port 1 Specifications The following table contains specifications for the 171 CCS 700 00 Momentum M1 Processor Adapter Memory Internal Memory 64K bytes User Memory 2 4K words Flash RAM 256K bytes Clock Speed 20 MHz Input and Output References Registers 2048 Discretes 2048 any combination of 0x and 1x references I O Servicing Local I O Services all the points on any host Momentum I O base Watchdog timeout 419 ms Logic solve time 0 25 ms k ladder logic instructions Continued on next page 30 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCS 700 00 Continued Specifications Continued Mechanical Weight 42 5 g 1 5 02 Dimensions HxDxW 25 9x61 02x125mm 1 01 x 2 37 x 4 86 in Material Enclosures bezels Lexan Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interaction
8. Result The cursor moves to the LEN column tilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode FA F2 _F3 __F 4 _F5 _ F6 F L Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 13 OF 2668 WORDS Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT 400001 400008 8 BIN SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT 400033 E BIN 5 Type the value 10 in the LEN column of the GLOBAL OUTPUT field to indicate the number of registers to be sent Push lt Enter gt Result The REFERENCE field is completed automatically and the cursor moves to the TYPE column OnError DelNode 6 7 PEER COP Timeout 500 ms Total Links Link Id i On Error CLEAR USED 17 OF 2606 WORDS Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT 400001 400008 8 BIN SPECIFIC OUTPUT S GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT 400033 400042 16 E Continued on next page 300 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining References for the Supervisory Computer Continued Specifying References for Node 2 Continued Next Step Step Action With the TYPE column of the GLOBAL OUTPUT filed set
9. 50 MHz clock speed cr Note The Ethernet port connector looks like a Modbus port connector Do not attempt to use an Ethernet adapter as a Modbus unit Do not attempt to place a Modbus connector in an Ethernet connector Illustration The connectors and LED indicators are shown in the following illustration a NANNY Aer NW I wama Schneider cg e tum Automation Inc TSX Momeni CEs ie Oa o e e a NTMI Label Description 1 Ethernet port connector 2 Modbus Port 2 connector LED indicators Continued on next page 56 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 980 20 Continued LED Indicators Specifications This Processor Adapter has three LED indicators RUN LAN ACT IVE and LAN ST ATUS Their functions are described in the table below LED Indicator Status Pattern Start up Both Single flash Indicates good health RUN Green On continuously when the CPU has received power and is solving logic Flashes an error pattern if the CPU is in kernel mode See Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes on page 417 Off CPU is not powered up or is not solving logic LAN ACT Green May be on continuously or blinking Indicates activity on Ethernet port Off No activity on Ethernet port LAN ST Green On continuously during normal operation Fast blink indicate
10. Saving to Flash in Modsoft Preparing to Save to Flash Before You Save to Flash Three Parameters Three Possible States Before you can save to Flash in Modsoft you need to specify how the controller will react when power is re established This section describes three options The next section describes how to specify an option Modsoft will ask you three questions Q1 Continue power down Run state Y N Q2 Start PLC after download Y N Q3 Continue Y N Q1 and Q2 define the state of the controller after power is re established Q3 simply initiates a save to Flash operation in the controller Q3 cannot be invoked unless Q1 and Q2 have been answered Y es or N o0 The following table shows you the three states that you may specify for the controller If the Answer Is Then the Controller Q1 Y Comes back in the state it was in Running or Stopped before Q2 N power was lost Q1 N Comes back Running when power is restored Q2 Y Q1 N Comes back Stopped when power is restored Q2 N 304 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Saving to Flash in Modsoft Saving to Flash Conditions for In order to save the application program and state RAM values to Flash Saving to Flash The Modsoft panel must be Online The PLC must be stopped not solving logic Save to Flash Follow the steps below to save to Flash Procedure Step Action 1 With the
11. Section 3 2 Assembling a CPU with an Option Adapter Overview Purpose An Option Adapter can only be used in conjunction with a Processor Adapter It cannot be used alone with an I O base This section describes how to add an Option Adapter when assembling a Momentum module and how to remove an Option Adapter from the assembled module In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Assembling a Processor Adapter and an Option Adapter 95 Mounting the Assembled Adapters on the I O Base 98 Disassembling a Module with an Option Adapter 101 94 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Assembling Momentum Components Assembling a Processor Adapter and an Option Adapter Overview Guidelines Connection Points Between Adapters No Tools Required If a Momentum Option Adapter is used it is mounted between a Momentum M1 Processor Adapter and a Momentum I O base in a three tiered stack This section contains guidelines safety precautions and a procedure for assembling a Processor Adapter and an Option Adapter The next section describes how to mount the assembled adapters on an I O base We recommend that you snap the Option Adapter and the M1 Processor Adapter together before mounting them on the I O base The Option Adapter and M1Processor connect at these four points The plastic snap extensions on the two sides of the M1 fit into the two slots on the s
12. 40degrees C maximum ambient temperature with the system continuously powered down Shelf life In excess of 5 yr room temperature Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interactions Enclosures and bezels are made of Lexan a polycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA Continued on next page 84 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Option Adapters Specifications Continued Specifications Continued RFI Susceptibility immunity Meets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of protection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric strength 500 V Ground continuity 30 A test on the exposed metal connectors Agency Approvals e UL 508 CSA CUL CE e FMclass1 div2 pending 870 USE 101 10 V 2 85 Option Adapters 86 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Assembling Momentum Components 3 At a G
13. Controller Status Ethernet Statistics 1 0 Status Support Schneider Automation Inc 1998 2000 v1 0 al Document Done Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 165 Using the Ethernet Port Momentum M1E Web Pages Continued CPU The CPU Configuration Page enables you to monitor your controller configuration Configuration and its status It has the following links Page Link Results Home Returns you to the Home Page Ethernet Statistics Displays the Ethernet Module Statistics with the Reset Counters page I O Status Displays the I O Status and Configuration page Support Displays contact information for technical assistance sales and feedback CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION States Stosped Rederence cce 60 30 Battery for Predict Type nmur Exec wo a08 Lo gyed ix mo Description Syriam Me mary Kh iane Pashdiemery Kb 1900 nb Total Memary yee 1532 V Migp Weeds Segmen CPU Speri MHz Lagi Prowet Canrtant Sweep Optimize TTT Registers tam 00001 301535 Iwa 1000P1 1000 12 bow 300091 300048 vox 400081401872 rO Be Port fas Battery ceil Jo Time ef Day Clock 1 Swper Cater o Home Ethorwat Statistics L O Status Supper Sekarider Auteoation bir 1908 2000 10 P Decurent Doas Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 166 Using the Ethernet Port Momentum M1E Web Pages C
14. Peer Cop 4 Modify the amount of configuration extension memory allocated to Peer Cop by typing a new value in the Expansion Size field OR by adjusting the sliding scale next to the field 5 Click the lt OK gt button 326 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Section 12 2 Configuring Option Adapter Features Overview Purpose This section describes how to implement the battery backup and time of day TOD clock features of the Momentum Option Adapters using Concept 2 2 In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Reserving and Monitoring a Battery Coil 328 Setting up the Time of Day Clock 331 Setting the Time 334 Reading the Time of Day Clock 335 870 USE 101 10 V 2 327 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Reserving and Monitoring a Battery Coil Introduction Since the Option Adapter does not have an LED to indicate when the battery is low we recommend that you reserve a Ox reference to monitor the health of the battery This section describes how to reserve and monitor a battery coil using the Specials dialog box in Concept 2 1 CF Note The 171 CCC 960 30 and 171 CCC 980 30 require Concept 2 2 with service release 2 Reserving a From the PLC Configuration screen perform the steps in the following table to Battery Coil reserve a battery coil Step Action 1 From the Config
15. This section contains safety precautions for handling components and a procedure for assembling a Processor Adapter and an I O base CAUTION AN ADAPTER MAY BE DAMAGED BY STATIC ELECTRICITY Use proper ESD procedures when handling the adapter and do not touch the internal elements The adapter s electrical elements are sensitive to static electricity Failure to observe this precaution can result in equipment damage CAUTION A N ELECTRICAL CIRCUITRY MAY BE EXPOSED Electrical circuitry on the I O base may be exposed when a Momentum adapter is not mounted Be sure that the I O base is not under power when it does not have an adapter mounted on it To be sure that power is not present do not insert the wiring connectors to the I O base until after the adapter has been mounted Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage and will void the product warranty Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 89 Assembling Momentum Components Assembling a Processor Adapter and I O Base Continued Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to assemble a Processor Adapter and an I O Assembling a base Processor Adapter and an Step Action I O Base 1 Choose a clean environment to assemble the I O base and adapter to protect the circuitry from contamination Be sure that the I O base is not under power when you assemble the module Align the two plastic snap extensions o
16. to send 16 words of specific output to the supervisor to receive the last seven words of global input from the supervisor Remember that the supervisor will be transmitting a total of 10 contiguous words of global data over the network Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 393 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Defining the References for the Next Node Continued Defining Specific Follow the steps in the table below to define the specific output in Peer Cop Outputs Step Action 1 Click on the Specific Output button Result The Specific Output dialog box appears Since you are addressing the device at address 1 you will use the line for Source 1 Type the value 400024 on that line in the Dest Ref column Type the value 16 in the Length column indicating that 16 words of data will be exchanged In this case we will leave the default BIN setting Specific Output x Range 400001 401872 1 32 Dest Node Source Ret Length Bin BCD 16 BIN OK Cancel Help Click lt OK gt Continued on next page 394 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Defining the References for the Next Node Continued Defining Global Follow the steps in the table below to define the global input data from the Inputs supervisory PLC at Mod
17. 9 0 1 9 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 0 9 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 0 9 60 64 6 0 4 Example of an The illustration below shows a sample setting for address 14 Address X10 x1 870 USE 101 10 V 2 199 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Peer Cop What Is Peer Cop Configuring Network Devices with Peer Cop Four Types of Data Transactions Sources and Destinations A Momentum M1 Processor Adapter has the ability to define point to point transactions between itself and other devices on the Modbus Plus network The tool for defining these transactions is a panel software configuration utility known as Peer Cop Each device on the network can be configured to send and receive Peer Cop data Ina Modbus Plus I O networking architecture the CPU on the network can be used to configure the entire Peer Cop database In a Modbus Plus supervisory architecture each CPU on the network needs to be configured to handle the Peer Cop data that it will send or receive Peer Cop allows you to define four types of data transactions Peer Cop Data Function Maximum Data Length Token Frame Transaction Global Output Data to be broadcast globally 32 words to all devices on the network Specific Output Data to be transmitted to 32 words device individual devices 500 words to all specific devices Global Input Data messages received by 32 words all device
18. Features of an Modbus Port 2 can be configured as an RS485 port RS485 supports two wire or RS485 Port four wire cabling A multimaster slave system must use two wire cabling A single master slave system may use two or four wire cabling The RS485 protocol handles messaging over long distances with higher level of noise immunity than RS232 without the need for modems Limit of Two The Momentum M1 Processor Adapters can support a maximum of two Modbus Modbus Ports ports If a 172JNN 210 32 Serial Option Adapter is used in conjunction with a 171 CCS 780 00 or 171 CCC 780 10 Processor Adapter the RS485 port on the Processor Adapter becomes Modbus Port 2 The port on the Option Adapter becomes electrically neutral and does not support any communication activities The TOD clock and battery backup system on the Option Adapter continue to work Continued on next page 120 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Modbus Port 2 Continued Port Parameters Modbus Port 2 offers the following communication parameters Baud 50 1800 75 2000 110 2400 134 3600 150 4800 300 7200 600 9600 1200 19 200 Parity EVEN ODD NONE Mode Data Bits 8 bit RTU 7 bit ASCII Stop Bit 1 Modbus Address In the range 1 247 Comm Protocol RS232 RS485 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 121 Using the Modbus Ports Modbus Port
19. Global Inputs Continued Next Step Step Action Type the value 1 in the INDEX column of the GLOBAL INPUT field indicating that the M1 CPU at Modbus Plus address 2 will receive the five words of global input data beginning with word 1 Push lt Enter gt Result The Peer Cop screen is now set to send eight words of specific output to the supervisor at Modbus Plus address 1 and receive five words of global data from the supervisor The screen should like this OnError De 1Node 6 ri Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id i On Error CLEAR USED 18 OF 2666 WORDS Access to Node 1 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400016 400023 8 BIN GLOBAL INPUT 400001 400005 5 BIN 1 GLOBAL INPUT ico si GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Defining the references for the next node 870 USE 101 10 V 2 291 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining the References for the Next Node Overview Link and Node Settings Defining Specific Outputs We now want to attach the Modsoft 2 6 programming panel to the 171 CCS 760 00 Momentum M1 CPU at Modbus Plus address 3 and create a similar Peer Cop for this device to communicate with the supervisory PLC at Modbus Plus address 1 In this case we want the M1 to send 16 words of specific output to the supervisor to receive
20. MBPlustime 0 e If there is a MB ring card then each scan will be extended 0 3 Msec even if there is no message e Modbus Messages will add from 1 to 2 msec per scan depending on the length of the message Note e The formula above presumes that all MSTR blocks and all configured connections are set to go as fast as possible In this case the M1E will attempt to exchange data with each device once per scan e f several devices are configured to communicate on a timed basis that is substantially larger than the scan time calculated then the communications to those devices will be spread out over several scans See Example below You have 50 ENT modules connected to a single M1E with a configured time of 50 Msec each a total of 4k user logic and no MB card The scan time for all modules configured as fast as possible would be 12 5 Msec 0 52 Msec 0 40 Msec 13 42 Msec However since the M1E will only communicate to 1 4 of the modules 12 5 Msec 50 Msec 1 4 on any given scan the corrected average scan time would be 1 4 x 12 5 0 52 0 40 4 1 Msec 870 USE 101 10 V 2 55 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 980 20 Overview This section describes the 171 CCC 980 20 Processor Adapter including key features an illustration and specifications Key Features The key features of this Processor Adapter are Ethernet port Modbus Port 2 RS485 only 544K bytes of internal memory
21. RXD TXD TXD Not used Signal common Not used Shield RJ45 Connector RXD RXD TXD TXD Not used Signal common Not used Shield Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 137 Using the Modbus Ports Pinouts for Modbus RS485 Networks Continued Modbus RS485 The illustration below shows the pinout for the Modbus RS485 Connector T DB9 Connector T base DB9 Base RJ45 Shielded Connector RJ45 Shielded Connector RXD 1 1 RXD RXD 2 ral 2 RXD TXD 3 3 TXD 4 4 Signal Signal TXD 6 6 TXD Shield 8 8 Shield Shell 100V 51 1 Shell CER OWY 1206 m 1206 1UF 7 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 9 M1 M2 RXD RXD TXD Signal TXD common DB9 Connector Continued on next page 138 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Pinouts for Modbus RS485 Networks Continued Modbus RS485 Connector T RJ45 Base The illustration below shows the pinout for the Modbus RS485 Connector T RJ45 base RJ45 Connector RJ45 Connector Shielded Female Shielded Female RXD 1 1 RXD RXD 2 2 RXD TXD 3 3 TXD 4 4 Signal 5 Signal common common TXD 6 6 TXD 7 7 Shield 8 8 Shield Shell Shell 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RXD RXD TXD Signal TXD common RJ45 Connector Unshielded Male Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 139 Using the Modbus Ports Pinouts for Modbus RS485 Networks Continued Terminating Resistor Plugs Terminating Shunt P
22. Section 2 3 Modbus Plus Option Adapter cecccccceseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeceeeeneeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaees 73 OETAN i An EEE E E AE tes yokes daetd ade vees cesbue wenrede cea ce neaned 73 Front Panel Components ceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseaeeeneeseaeeseaeees 74 Specifications iiig ae e a e Panini eee 77 Section 2 4 Redundant Modbus Plus Option Adapter c cceecceseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeee 79 OVEIVIOW Ee eS o asad eerie deg Tae ctecdh Hateieheaectien ele ae ae 79 Front Panel Components eeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeeeeseeeeeaeees 80 Specifications ierse i aiani escent dep ee aces 84 Chapter3 Assembling Momentum Components ecceeesseseseee 87 Section 3 1 Assembling a OPW E A eit ci E tai eee del ied 88 OVEIVIOW evs E 2 Beit E ecg ete tee Paani eae asec Rena ees ees 88 Assembling a Processor Adapter and I O Base cccscccesseeeeeseeeesseeeeeeees 89 Disassembling a Processor Adapter from an I O Base cesceeeeeereeeteeeees 92 Section 3 2 Assembling a CPU with an Option Adapter cccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 94 OVEN VIOW els toch et a TA ilk ia Uc AEE Se CRS SOEs CL MS et is 2d ala Sd 94 Assembling a Processor Adapter and an Option Adapter cceeseeeeeeeee 95 Mounting the Assembled Adapters on the I O Base csccessseeeeseeeeteees 98 Disassembling a Module with an Option Adapter ccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeet
23. Tools Required Procedure Disassembling an Adapter from This section contains safety precautions and a procedure for disassembling a Processor Adapter from an I O base CAUTION ELECTRICAL CIRCUITRY MAY BE EXPOSED Before removing an adapter from the base disconnect the wiring connectors Be sure that the I O base is not under power when it does not have a Momentum adapter mounted on it Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage and will void the product warranty A flat head screw driver Follow the steps in the table below to remove a Processor Adapter from an I O base an I O Base Step Action 1 Choose a clean environment to disassemble the unit in order to protect the circuitry from contamination 2 Be sure that the I O base is not under power by removing the terminal connectors from the I O base Continued on next page 92 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Assembling Momentum Components Disassembling a Processor Adapter from an I O Base Continued Procedure Disassembling Step Action an Adapter from 3 Use a screwdriver to push the clips on both sides of the Processor Adapter inward an I O Base as shown in the illustration below Continued 4 Lift adapter straight up and away from base maintaining pressure on clips 870 USE 101 10 V 2 93 Assembling Momentum Components
24. allow you to I O Map the I O points on the local base unit Memory allocated for configuration extension None None None 214 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Range of Discrete and Register References Introduction Guidelines This section provides guidelines and a procedure for changing the range of discrete Ox and 1x and register 3x and 4x references When you change the range of discrete and register references follow these guidelines Adjust the range of discretes in increments of 16 Sixteen discretes consume one word Adjust the range of registers in increments of 1 Each register consumes one word The total number of register and discrete references cannot exceed 3k words e A minimum configuration of 16 0x discretes 16 1x discretes one 3x register and one 4x register is required Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 215 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Range of Discrete and Register References Continued Procedure From the Configuration Overview screen follow the steps below to change the range of discrete and register references Step Action 1 From the Overview menu select Ranges Result The cursor will appear in the Ranges field of the editor on the high range Ox value tilit OverView I OMap Ports Segmnts Loadable Cfg Ext Quit F1 F2
25. 0x and 1x references I O Servicing Local I O Services all the points on any host Momentum I O base Watchdog timeout 262 ms Logic solve time 0 16 ms k ladder logic instructions Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 33 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCS 700 10 Continued Specifications Continued Mechanical Weight 42 5 g 1 5 oz Dimensions HxDxW 25 9x61 02x125mm 1 01 x 2 37 x 4 86 in Material Enclosures bezels Lexan Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interactions Enclosures and bezels are made of Lexan a polycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA RFI Susceptibility immunity Meets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of protection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric st
26. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Continued on next page 254 870 USE 101 10 V 2 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Modsoft Editing the I OBus I O Map Continued Generic InterBus InterBus device manufacturers embed an identifier code in their network slave Module Identifier modules in conformance with InterBus standards The code identifies a device by Codes its I O type but not its specific model or name OBus recognizes the InterBus identifier codes provided below and allows you to I O Map devices that use these codes However you cannot use the module zoom screens to define the parameters for these InterBus modules Identifier Code I O Type 0101_IOBUS One word discrete output 0102_lIOBUS One word discrete input 0103_IOBUS One word discrete bidirectional 0201_IOBUS Two word discrete output 0202_IOBUS Two word discrete input 0203_IOBUS Two word discrete bidirectional 0231_IOBUS Two word analog output 0232_IOBUS Two word analog input 0233_IOBUS Two word analog bidirectional 0301_IOBUS Three word discrete output 0302_IOBUS Three word discrete input 0303_IOBUS Three word discrete bidirectional 0331_IOBUS Three word analog output 0332_IOBUS Three word analog input 0333_IOBUS Three word analog bidirectional 0401_IOBUS Four word discrete output 0402_IOBUS Four w
27. 1 lt M 1 TX TX 2 4 o 2 X Shield 3 lt 3 Shied Not used 4 4 Not used 5 lt gt 5 Notused 7 7 Not used Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 195 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Pinouts and Wiring Illustrations for Modbus Plus Networks Continued Modbus Plus The following illustration shows the pinout for the Modbus Plus Connector T DB9 Connector T base DB9 Base RJ45 Shielded Connector RJ45 Shielded Connector TX 1 E 1 TX TX 2 E 2 TX Shield 3 E 3 Shield 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 1 UF 8 500 V 8 Shell m Shell 1 2 3 TX TX Shield Shell Connector Continued on next page 196 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Pinouts and Wiring Illustrations for Modbus Plus Networks Continued Terminating Resistor Plugs RJ45 Connector 1 1 4W 1210hm 2 1 3 4 1 4W 1210hm 5 1 The following illustration shows the pinout for the Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 Terminating RJ45 Resistor Plugs 870 USE 101 10 V 2 197 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Modbus Plus Addresses Introduction Modbus Plus devices function as peers on a logical ring Each device accesses the network by acquiring a token frame that is passed in a rotating address sequence Each device on a Modbus Plus network needs a unique address in the range 1 64 The device address determines the logical order in which the network token will b
28. 101 10 V 2 285 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Confirming the Peer Cop Summary Information Overview Once you have defined the link and accessed a node the Peer Cop summary information values assume default settings This section describes those settings Timeout The default Timeout is 500 ms Timeout is the maximum interval that Modbus Plus on a Peer Copped device will remain healthy without communication activity If this interval is exceeded the device will clear its network health bit and will no longer try to communicate via Modbus Plus The timeout interval must be in the range 20 2000 ms and it must be specified as an increment of 20 ms For our example we will use the default setting On Error The default On Error setting is CLEAR The On Error setting specifies how the Peer Copped device will treat the last values received before a timeout once Modbus Plus communications have been restored One of two settings may be used CLEAR or HOLD CLEAR sets all the previously received values to 0 and HOLD retains the previous values For our example we will use the default setting Next Step Specifying references for input and output data 286 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Specifying References for Input and Output Data Overview We will now set up the 171 CCS 760 00 Momentum M1 CPU at Modbus Plus address 2 This device will send eight 4x registers of specific output
29. 172 PNN 210 22 Modbus Plus Option Adapter 2 170 ADI 340 00 170 PNT 110 20 16 point input Modbus Plus Communication Adapter 3 170 ADO 340 00 170 PNT 110 20 16 point output Modbus Plus Communication Adapter 4 170 ADI 350 00 170 PNT 110 20 32 point input Modbus Plus Communication Adapter 5 170 ADO 350 00 170 PNT 110 20 32 point output Modbus Plus Communication Adapter Address In this type of architecture assign the lowest network address 1 to the CPU Strategy When the network initializes the CPU will be the first device to get the token and the token rotation table will be built with respect to the controlling device on the network 870 USE 101 10 V 2 377 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Changing the Peer Cop Summary Information Overview For our example we will change the default Health Timeout setting to 240 ms and the default Last Value setting to Hold on timeout Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to change the default values using the Peer Cop dialog box Step Action 1 Click the Hold on Timeout radio button Result The Hold on Timeout option is selected and the Clear on Timeout option is deselected Expansion Size fo Fa E E satoo g Health timeout msec o af gt Last value Global Specific Clear on timeout Input Input Output Output Cancel Hep Conti
30. 2 Continued Default Parameters CF CF Auto Logout Feature Only with RS232 The factory set default communication parameters for Modbus Port 2 are 9600 baud EVEN parity 8 bit RTU mode 1 stop bit Modbus network address 1 RS232 protocol Note Processor Adapters support only one stop bit If you change this default setting in the configuration software the Processor Adapter will ignore the change Note The default protocol must be changed from RS232 to RS485 for the 171 CCS 780 00 171 CCC 780 10 Processor Adapters or the port will not function The 171 CCC 980 20 and 171 CCC 980 30 change automatically If the Serial Option Adapter is used and the RS232 port is chosen auto logout is supported If a programming panel is logged into the CPU via the serial port and its cable gets disconnected the Processor Adapter automatically logs out the port This auto logout feature is designed to prevent a lock up situation that could prevent other host stations from logging in on other ports Auto logout is not available for any RS485 port including the RS485 option on the Serial Option Adapter The user must log out of the processor using the programming software 122 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Four Wire Cabling Schemes for Modbus RS485 Networks Introduction Length Number of Devices Termination Master Cable Four wire cabling schemes may be used for single master slave communi
31. 450 m Description Part Number Modicon RR85 Repeater NW RR85 000 The maximum number of devices in a network is 64 lf you use only Momentum products you may use up to 64 devices on one cable segment without a repeater lf you use a mixture of devices you may use up to 32 devices on one cable section You must use a repeater to connect to another cable section You may use up to three repeaters and four cable sections in all The maximum number of clusters in a network is 8 The maximum number of devices in a cluster is 8 Only Momentum devices may be used in the cluster Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 187 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Cluster Mode Cabling Schemes Continued Termination Cable Between Nodes ina Cluster Cable Between Clusters Drop Cables You must terminate both ends of the network with special terminating resistors Description Part Number Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 Terminating RJ45 Resistor Plugs pack of 2 170 XTS 021 00 The minimum length of cable between nodes in a cluster is 10 in 25 m Description Part Number Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 Short Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 10 Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 3 ft Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 36 The minimum length of cable between clusters is 10 ft 3 m Description Part Number Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 10
32. 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 77 Option Adapters Specifications Continued Specifications Continued RFI Susceptibility immunity Meets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of protection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric strength 500 V Ground continuity 30 A test on the exposed metal connector Agency Approvals e UL508 CSA CUL CE e FMclass1 div2 pending 78 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Option Adapters Section 2 4 Redundant Modbus Plus Option Adapter Overview Purpose This section describes the 172 PNN 260 22 Redundant Modbus Plus Option Adapter including the front panel components and specifications In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Front Panel Components 80 Specifications 84 870 USE 101 10 V 2 79 Option Adapters Front Panel Components Overview The front panel includes Two 9 pin D shell connectors for Modbus P
33. 8 BIN GLOBAL INPUT 400001 E BIN GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 289 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Specifying References for Input and Output Data Continued Defining the Global Inputs Step Action Continued 2 Type the value 5 in the LEN column of the GLOBAL INPUT field indicating that the CPU will receive five words of global data from the supervisory computer Push lt Enter gt Result The cursor moves into the TYPE column of the GLOBAL INPUT field GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode F1 F2 a F5 ss se F9 PEER COP Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 18 OF 2000 WORDS Access to Node 1 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400016 400023 8 BIN GLOBAL INPUT 490001 400005 5 JN GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT 3 The default data format for these words is binary BIN This is the desired type for our example so push lt Enter gt twice Result The cursor moves into the INDEX column of the GLOBAL INPUT field Continued on next page 290 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Specifying References for Input and Output Data Continued Defining the
34. CF Note The Ethernet port connector looks like a Modbus port connector Do not attempt to use an Ethernet adapter as a Modbus unit Do not attempt to place a Modbus connector in an Ethernet connector Continued on next page 60 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 980 30 Continued Illustration The connectors and LED indicators are shown in the following illustration PENS SENT Neal ee e ey e Schneider TSX Momentum Automation Inc _ PROCESSOR ADAPTER MEG WRITE ASSIGNE ENET RS485 V 01 00 00 V OTO N 31993900845 Warranty Ref 03 2000 Qe ce HL OO P L RL PA S i SI Label Description 1 Ethernet port connector 2 Modbus Port 2 connector 3 LED indicators Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 61 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 980 30 Continued LED Indicators This Processor Adapter has three LED indicators RUN LAN ACT IVE and LAN ST ATUS Their functions are described in the table below LED Indicator Status Pattern Start up Both Single flash Indicates good health RUN Green On continuously when the CPU has received power and is solving logic Flashes an error pattern if the CPU is in kernel mode See Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes on page 417 Off CPU is not powered up or is not solving logic LAN ACT Green May be on c
35. DI_N Data In Negated Data In Negated 8 Vcc 8 Vec Additional power Additional power supply for fiber optic supply for fiber optic adapter adapter 9 Plug identification 9 Not used Physically isolated 870 USE 101 10 V 2 179 Using the I OBus Port 180 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Plus Ports 7 At a Glance Purpose CF In This Chapter Modbus Plus ports are available with 172 PNN 210 22 Option Adapter Single Port 172 PNN 260 22 Option Adapter Redundant Ports This section gives an overview of Modbus Plus networks for Momentum components Note The Modbus Plus Network Planning and Installation Manual 890 USE 100 00 provides details for the complete design and installation of a Modbus Plus cable system This chapter contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Modbus Plus Features for Momentum 182 Two Types of Modbus Plus Networks 183 Standard Cabling Schemes 185 Cluster Mode Cabling Schemes 187 Cable Accessories for Modbus Plus Networks 191 Pinouts and Wiring Illustrations for Modbus Plus Networks 194 Modbus Plus Addresses 198 Peer Cop 200 870 USE 101 10 V 2 181 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Modbus Plus Features for Momentum Introduction When a Modbus Plus network is constructed entirely of Momentum components it may take advantage of two new features cluster mode which allows sma
36. Follow the steps below to specify an M1 Processor Type Step Action 1 As a result of selecting an M1 Processor Adapter you will be presented with a pop up screen that allows you to select the machine type Move the cursor onto the desired memory size 2 4 12 0 or 18 0 Utilit OverView I OMap Ports Segmnts Loadable Cfg Ext Qui 1 PERR Ft F F8 F9 F5 F6 CONFIGURATION OVERU IEW Size of Full Logic Area 61678 PLC f 170 Map Words 00032 PLC Type MOMNTUM Model ML 1 0 Type MOMENTUM System Memory 2 4K of Segments 1 Extended Memory K p Reserved Words Specials Ranges Battery Coil xxxx 666061 001536 Timer Register 1xxxx 166061 100512 Time of Day Clock 3xxxx 366061 300048 Cfg Extension Used Size ox 400061 401872 4xxxx lt gt SFC None Dupl Coils Start 8 xxxx lt gt SFC Push lt Enter gt 870 USE 101 10 V 2 211 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Default Configuration Parameters Overview This section describes the default configuration parameters Defaults for a This sample Configuration Overview screen shows the default configuration 2 4K Adapter parameters Fi F2 _ _F3 _ __F 4 F5 _F6 F Lev 8 F8 OFF F CONFIGURATION OVERU IEW Size of Full Logic Area 01678 PLC No of I 0 Map Words 00032 PLC Type MOMNTUM Model Mi Ivo 1 0 Type MOMENTUM System Memory 2 4K Number of Segments 1 Extende
37. I O Map from the default value of 512 to 256 a decrease of 256 words The default Size of Full Logic Area will automatically increase from 1198 to 1454 Similarly if you allocate some number of words to configuration extension memory to support Peer Cop you will reduce the Size of Full Logic Area by the number of words allocated the configuration extension memory 870 USE 101 10 V 2 217 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Number of Segments Introduction The number of segments specified in the Configuration Overview screen determines the number of I O Map drops that you will be able to set up for your CPU The number of segments you will need depends on whether your Processor Adapter will support an I OBus network For I OBus You must change the number of segments to 2 if you want to create an I O Map to Networks support an I OBus network For All Other The default number of segments 1 is correct You only need one drop because Cases the only points to be I O Mapped are those on the local base Continued on next page 218 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Number of Segments Continued Procedure From the Configuration Overview screen follow the steps below to change the number of segments Step Action 1 From the Overview menu select I O Result The cursor will appear in the I O field of the editor on the number o
38. I O servicing or non deterministic supervisory servicing of programming user interface and third party ModConnect devices Do not use a supervisory network to service critical I O Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage In a deterministic I O network architecture one CPU services up to 63 Momentum I O modules Terminal I O modules or other Modbus Plus devices Note When a programming panel or other human machine interface HMI device is used as part of a deterministic Modbus Plus I O network it should be connected via the RS232 port on the CPU not as a Modbus Plus node In a supervisory architecture several intelligent processing devices share system data with each other Many kinds of devices may be part of the network You should be aware of each device s requirement for access to the network and of the impact each device will have on the timing of your network communication especially when servicing non critical and non deterministic I O Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 183 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Two Types of Modbus Plus Networks Continued What if Need If your system requires both supervisory and I O handling architectures one Both Types solution is to use a Processor Adapter with I OBus capabilities as the I O network and either a 172 PNN 210 22 or 172 PNN 260 22 Option Adapter with Modbus Plus for the supervisory network 184 870
39. IP address from your system administrator to avoid duplication Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage IP Address Type a valid IP address in the Internet Address text box as shown X0 Scanner Ioj x Ethernet Configuration Specify IP Address Internet Address Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Use Bootp Server BEES pooo C Disable Ethernet za ni Gateway Consult your system administrator to determine the appropriate gateway Type it in the Gateway text box as shown 40 Scanner _ oO x Ethernet Configuration Specify IP Address Intemet Address 1 0 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 C Use Bootp Server 3 m C Disable Ethernet Gateway MIME Continued on next page 348 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Setting Ethernet Address Parameters Continued Subnet Mask Consult your system administrator to obtain the appropriate subnet mask Type it in the Subnet Mask text box as shown W0 Scanner _ Oo x Ethernet Configuration Specify IP Address Internet Address fi 0 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 C Use Bootp Server e poao Disable Ethernet 0 0 0 0 870 USE 101 10 V 2 349 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Configuring I O Overview Once the Ethernet port address parameters have been set you may assign parameters for I O scanning Health Block Specify the starting register of the register bloc
40. Math Instructions ADD Adds top node value to middle node value 3 SUB Subtracts middle node value from top node value 3 MUL Multiplies top node value by middle node value 3 DIV Divides top node value by middle node value 3 DX Move Instructions RVT Moves register values to a table 3 TVR Moves specified table values to a register TVT Moves a specified set of values from one table to 3 another table BLKM Moves a specified block of data 3 FIN Specifies first entry in a FIFO queue 3 FOUT Specifies first entry out of a FIFO queue 3 SRCH Performs a table search 3 STAT CROSS REF 1 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 407 Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions Standard Ladder Logic Elements Continued Standard Ladder Logic Symbol Meaning Nodes Consumed Instructions DX Matrix Instructions Continued AND Logically ANDs two matrices 3 OR Does logical inclusive OR of two matrices 3 XOR Does logical exclusive OR of two matrices 3 COMP Performs logical complement of values in a matrix 3 CMPR Logically compares values in two matrices 3 MBIT Logical bit modify 3 SENS Logical bit sense 3 BROT Logical bit rotate 3 AD16 Signed unsigned 16 bit addition 3 SU16 Signed unsigned 16 bit subtraction 3 TEST Compares the magnitudes of the values in the top and 3 middle nodes MU16 Signed unsigned 16 bit multiplication 3 DV16 Signed unsigned 16 bit div
41. Node 1 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT a SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400024 400039 is BE GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT 7 GLOBAL INPUT oe GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT 3 With the TYPE column of the SPECIFIC OUTPUT filed set to BIN push lt Enter gt twice Result The Peer Cop screen should like this GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode F1 _ F2 F3 _F 4 __F5 F6 F Lev 8 F8 OFF F PEER COP Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 13 OF 2666 WORDS Access to Node 1 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT re SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400024 400039 16 BIN GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 293 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining the References for the Next Node Continued Defining Global Follow the steps in the table below to define the global input data from the Inputs supervisory PLC at Modbus Plus address 1 Step Action 1 In the REFERENCE column of the first GLOBAL INPUT field type the value 400001 the first register which will be used to store global input data Push lt Enter gt Result The cursor moves to the LEN column Utilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError D
42. OBus Network with Modsoft Accessing an I O Map Screen for an I OBus Network Overview Procedure This section describes how to access an I O Map screen for an I OBus network To access the I O Map screen for your I OBus network perform the steps in the following table Step Action 1 From the Configuration Overview screen move the cursor onto the I OMap command on the top menu and push lt Enter gt Result The Type MOMENTUM I O screen for the local I O base appears tilit ClrDrop 2 REE i EERTE i MOMENTUM Type MOMENTUM IO Drop 1 Available 239 Number of Inputs 16 Number of Outputs 16 Mi BASE Module Output Ref ription Input Ref Des 176 ADM 696 SOM oh E n 400001 400091 1 in 8o0ut 12Qvac Continued on next page 250 870 USE 101 10 V 2 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Modsoft Accessing an I O Map Screen for an I OBus Network Continued Procedure Ste Action Continued p 2 Select Drop from the top menu bar of this I O Map screen Result A pull down menu appears Jtilit ClrDrop HoldTme t Drop QUANTUM 1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Drop MOMENTUM Previous Drop ALT P Type MOMENTUM IO Next Drop ALT N Go to Drop ALT G Number of Inputs Add Drop Delete Drop Mi BASE Module Input Ref 170 ADM 690 50 300001 300091 PE 1Gin 8out 12Qvac 3 Select Add Drop or Next Drop if you have already established the drop from the pull down menu
43. OBus port 512K bytes of internal memory 32 MHz clock speed Note The Modbus port connector looks like a Ethernet port connector Do not attempt to use an Modbus adapter as an Ethernet unit Do not attempt to place an Ethernet connector in a Modbus connector The connectors and LED indicators are shown in the following illustration TADS w p une Ta eG net schneider ee PACT TSX Momentum A Atremation ine mc 471 CCC 760 10 be PROCESSOR ADAPTER 512 R22 YOR gn sresceotea4 wn EN POA Ro 0808 S y A r ee ae Label Description 1 Modbus Port 1 connector I OBus port connector LED indicators Continued on next page 38 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 760 10 Continued LED Indicators This Processor Adapter has two LED indicators RUN and COM ACT Their functions are described in the table below LED Status Function Start up Both Single flash Indicates good health RUN Green On continuously when the CPU has received power and is solving logic Flashes an error pattern if the CPU is in kernel mode See Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes on page 417 Off CPU is not powered up or is not solving logic COM ACT Green May be on continuously or blinking Indicates activity on Modbus port 1 Off No activity on Modbus port 1 Specifications The following table contains specifications
44. PLC online go to the Ladder diagram editor or the Segment Status Display 2 From the PlcOps pull down on the top menu select Save to Flash Result If the PLC is stopped when you select Save to Flash the following screen appears Utility PTcops Elements Edit Go Srch Network Refs Tools F7 Lev 8 F8 ON CTRL F5 RAM Loading Options Continue Power Down Run State Y N Start PLC After Download Continue Format Binary Online 3 Answer the first two questions to specify the way you want the PLC to restart after a power down Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 305 Saving to Flash in Modsoft Saving to Flash Continued Save to Flash Procedure Step Action Continued 4 Type Y in response to question 3 Result The PLC will save your application logic and state RAM table to Flash When the save is completed the following system message appears Utility PTcOps ETements Edit Go Srch Network Refs Tools F7 Lev 8 F8 ON F CTRL F5 Optimize Mode Save to Flash 00050 Reference Data System Message EEPROM was successfully programmed Format Binary Online Range 1 306 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Concept IV At a Glance Purpose This part describes how to configure an M1 CPU how to I O map an I OBus network how to configure a Modbus Plus network with Peer Cop and how to save to Flash using Concept 2 1 In T
45. Parity 340 Changing the Delay 341 Changing the Modbus Address 342 Changing the Protocol on Modbus Port 2 343 336 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Accessing the Modbus Port Settings Dialog Box Introduction Modbus port parameters can be modified using the Modbus Port Settings dialog box in Concept 2 2 How to Get There From the Configure menu select Modbus port settings Modbus Port If you have not previously modified any port parameters the following dialog box Default Settings will appear The dialog box shows the default parameters for two Modbus ports 1 and 2 if your system configuration supports two ports If you have previously modified any communication port parameters the new values will appear in the dialog box Modbus Port Settings ix l Bridge Mode __ Baud Data bits Stop bits Parity Delay ms Address Mode Protocol 2 9600 81 Even 10 1 RTU RS485 Cancel Hep 870 USE 101 10 V 2 337 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Changing the Baud Rate Overview Each port can be configured for a baud in the range 50 19 200 Sixteen valid baud rates are user selectable The factory set default is 9600 baud Procedure To change the baud parameter perform the steps in the following table Step Action 1 Click on the down arrow under the Baud heading Result A menu appear
46. Quit Fi F3 F4 FS F6 F Lev 8 F8 OFF F CONFIGURATION OVERU IEW Size of Full Logic Area 17676 PLC No of I 0 Map Words 66632 PLC Type MOMNTUM Model Mi Ivo 1 0 Type MOMENTUM System Memory 18 K Number of Segments 1 Extended Memory K I 0 Map Reserved Words Specials Ranges Battery Coil xxxx 666061 661536 Timer Register 1xxxx 166061 166512 Time of Day Clock 3xxxx 366061 366048 Cfg Extension Used Size 4xxxx 400061 401872 4xxxx lt gt SFC None Dupl Coils Start Bxxxx lt gt SFC Overview allows access to PLC type ranges I 0 ASCII and Specials Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 213 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Default Configuration Parameters Continued Default Values Here are the default parameters Parameter 2 4K Adapter 12 0K Adapter 18 0K Adapter Coils in state RAM 1536 0x 1536 0x 1536 0x Discrete inputs in state 512 1x 512 1x 512 1x RAM Input registers in state 48 3x 48 3x 48 3x RAM Output registers in state 1872 4x 1872 4x 1872 4x RAM Bytes of user memory 1678 13100 17676 space available for application logic Words of user memory 32 512 32 space for the I O Map I O logic segments One which will One which will One which will allow you to I O Map the I O points on the local base unit allow you to I O Map the I O points on the local base unit
47. Results Home Returns you to the Home Page Controller Status Displays the CPU Configuration page Ethernet Statistics Displays the Ethernet Module Statistics with the Reset Counters page I O Status Displays the I O Status and Configuration page X Schneider Automation Support Netscape Edit View Go Window Help 4 7 Ge Aor ty BookmarksLocation http eio4 support htm 4 er What s related Contacting Schneider Automation pe e are ormation to reach us for assistance ical Information vith Xe ner St ination web site Technical Assistance If you need technical assistance with a product or service contact us by mail at customercentral schneiderautomation com or telephone us at 1 800 468 5342 or Noto Be sure to supply your name telephone number company name and address within your email to assure a immediate response Feedback Thoughts comments ideas about our site Please let us know by contacting us at feedback modicon com U S Sales Office a Look up a location of a Sales Office in the US Other Transparent Factory Products Visit out Transparent Factory web site Home Contoller Status Ethernet Statistics I O Status Schneider Automation Inc 1998 2000 v1 0 w Applet com schneiderautomation sysdiag qbf M 110 Appletstopped 870 USE 101 10 V 2 169 Using the Ethernet Port Momentum M1E I
48. _F 5 F 6 F f Lev 8 F8 0FF F3 MOMENTUM Type MOMENTUM IO Drop 1 Available 461 Number of Inputs Number of Outputs 9 M1 BASE Module Output Ref Description 170 ADM 370 10 1Gint8out 24ude 2A Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 243 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Accessing and Editing the I O Map Continued Editing the Local I O Map Step Action Type Numbe M1 BASE HoldTme F 3 4 5 6 F TLE MOMENTUM MOMENTUM IO r of Inputs 16 Module Input Ref 170 ADM 370 10 300001 300001 Assign the appropriate state RAM reference s to the unit Example In the screen below one 3x register 300001 has been assigned for the input points and one 4x register 400001 has been assigned for the output points QUANTUM 8 F8 OFF F3 45 Drop 1 Available Number of Outputs 16 Output Ref 400001 400001 Description 16int8out 24ude 2A Press lt Esc gt to return to the Configuration Overview editor Continued on next page 244 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Accessing and Editing the I O Map Continued Local I O Only I O Bus A Special Case 170 ADM 370 10 300001 300001 400001 400001 16in 8out 24udc 2A EE This screen is always used to I O Map the local I O base only No other I O base units can be I O Mapped on this screen If you attempt to select a second Momentum I O base in th
49. and the I O base to provide A battery backup for the CPU A time of day clock Extra communication ports This chapter describes the three types of Momentum Option Adapters This chapter contains the following sections For This Topic See Section On Page Introducing the Momentum Option Adapters 1 66 Serial Option Adapter 2 67 Modbus Plus Option Adapter 3 73 Redundant Modbus Plus Option Adapter 4 79 870 USE 101 10 V 2 65 Option Adapters Section 2 1 Introducing the Momentum Option Adapters Basic Features of Option Adapters Introduction Batteries Time of Day Clock Communication Ports This section describes the basic features of all Option Adapters Batteries A time of day TOD clock Communication port s The batteries back up the CPU s user program and state RAM The time of day clock allows you to use the date and time as an element in your user program The three Momentum Option Adapters are distinguished by the communications ports they offer as shown in the table below Option Adapter Communication Port s 172 JNN 210 32 Software selectable RS232 RS485 serial port 172 PNN 210 22 One Modbus Plus port 172 PNN 260 22 Two Modbus Plus ports for a redundant back up cable run 66 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Option Adapters Section 2 2 Serial Option Adapter Ove
50. assigned to it and adds any output data to the stream Data is transmitted at 500 kbits s The number of 16 bit words in the data stream is dependent on the processor model Model Max Input Words Max Output Words 171 CCS 760 00 128 128 171 CCC 760 10 256 256 171 CCC 960 20 256 256 171 CCC 960 30 256 256 Note Processors that support IEC are limited to a maximum number of 1408 used I O points regardless of the number of modules 870 USE 101 10 V 2 173 Using the I OBus Port Network Status Indication in the M1 Ethernet Module Overview Operation Failure Indication BITS 0 14 BIT 15 The M1 Ethernet Module can provide I OBus network status via the Module Status function in the programming panel or by a STAT element in user logic The fourth word of the status element contains information regarding the integrity of the network The I OBus status word contains a valid value only when the processor is running A zero value indicates that normal I OBus communication is occurring A non zero value indicates a problem If there is a communications error bit values in the I OBus status word contain information on the failure mode as follows These bits contain a value from 1 to 255 signifying the network position of the module that cannot be reached For example a value of 8 indicates a communications failure in accessing the 8 module on the network This b
51. black 170 MCI 020 10 Single Master The following illustration shows components used in a four wire single master slave Slave Option 1 cabling scheme In this view a master cable 8 is used on both sides of the master Each Momentum module must include a Processor Adapter or Option Adapter with a Modbus RS485 port Slave Master Slave Slave Slave cr Note Each cable has different colored boots The color of the boots signifies the cable s function Label Description Part Number pen Terminating resistor plug 170 XTS 021 00 Modbus RS485 connector T DB9 base 170 XTS 040 00 Modbus RS485 Master Communication Cable 170 MCI 041 10 Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 Short Interconnect Cable a AJOJN 170 MCI 020 10 Modbus RS485 connector T RJ45 base 170 XTS 041 00 Continued on next page 124 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Four Wire Cabling Schemes for Modbus RS485 Networks Continued Single Master The following illustration shows components used in a four wire single master slave Slave Option 2 cabling scheme In this view the master is at one end of the network and is connected by a single master cable 3 Terminating resistors 1 are used at both ends of the network Each Momentum module must
52. built with respect to the supervising device 282 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Configuring a Node to Exchange Data Getting Started To Peer Cop this sample configuration each CPU must be separately programmed to communicate with the others over Modbus Plus Begin by connecting your programming panel to the 171 CCS 760 00 Momentum M1 device at Modbus Plus address 2 Access the Peer Cop with your Modsoft 2 6 software When you reach the default Peer Cop screen you need to initialize the summary information region To do this define a link value and a node value in the Add Node popup What Is a Link The link is the Modbus Plus network on which the CPU resides The only valid link value for a Momentum M1 CPU is 1 An M1 can function only on one Modbus Plus network multiple Modbus Plus links are not supported What Is a Node The node is the Modbus Plus address of one of the I O devices on the network For our example we will first access the AT984 supervisory PLC at Modbus Plus address 1 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 283 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Configuring a Node to Exchange Data Continued Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to define the link and access a node Step Action 1 With the cursor flashing in the Link value field of the Add Node popup make sure that the Link value in the popup is 1 Push lt Enter gt Resul
53. communications in a four wire cabling Communication scheme This cable is 10 long and has a blue boot Cable Description Part Number Illustration Modbus RS485 RJ45 RJ45 Master Communication Cable 170 MCI 041 10 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 129 Using the Modbus Ports Cable for Modbus RS485 Networks Continued Interconnect Cable for connecting two Modbus RS485 devices such as Momentum modules is Cables available from Schneider Automation in four lengths These cables have a black boot Description Part Number Illustration Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 170 MCI 020 10 Short Interconnect Cable 10 Can be used for Ethernet Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 170 MCI 020 36 3 ft Interconnect Cable Can be used for Ethernet Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 170 MCI 021 80 10 ft Interconnect Cable Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 170 MCI 020 80 30 ft Interconnect Cable Continued on next page 130 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Cable for Modbus RS485 Networks Continued Other Premade Cable Custom Cable Custom Cable Vendors Crimping Tool Interconnect and Ethernet cable in various lengths and boot colors may be obtained from other vendors including Amp Description Amp Part Number 2 ft 621 894 2 5 ft 621 894 4 7 ft 621 894 5 10 ft 621 894 6 14 ft 621 894 7
54. download Other host operations This section describes the port The Modbus Port 1 connector is a female RJ45 phone jack The following illustration shows the position of Modbus Port 1 on a Processor Adapter RUN COM ACT 171 CCS 760 00 Label Description Modbus Port 1 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 113 Using the Modbus Ports Modbus Port 1 Continued Port Parameters Modbus Port 1 supports the following communication parameters Baud 50 1800 75 2000 110 2400 134 3600 150 4800 300 7200 600 9600 1200 19 200 Parity EVEN ODD NONE Mode Data Bits 7 bit ASCII 8 bit RTU Stop Bit 1 Modbus Address In the range 1 247 Continued on next page 114 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Modbus Port 1 Continued Default Parameters Auto Logout Feature The factory set default communication parameters for Modbus Port 1 are 9600 baud EVEN parity 8 bit RTU mode 1 stop bit Modbus address A Processor Adapter cannot support more than one stop bit If you change this default setting in the configuration software the Processor Adapter will ignore the change All other port parameters can be successfully modified in the configuration software If a programming panel is logged into the CPU via the RS232 serial port and its cable gets dis
55. eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee 389 Defining the References for the Next Node eeesceesseeeseneeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneees 393 Defining References for the Supervisory PLC c eeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaes 396 Saving to Flash with Concept csessecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 399 SAVING to Flash S raene hepi a E deat ste aee ak des inca iad peiaas sis Ee ia ea 399 Appendices asda cssasusscas ecsadaansnuseveacsnennctseneniadaad evdenssatenetiensasesian 403 Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions cceeeeeeeee 405 Standard Ladder Logic Element c ccesceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeesseeeseeeeeneeeaas 406 DX Loddable Support i ieieseeh sises ieee thas reeeevdet eee Sheet eree as 410 A Special S TAT INStruction r ae Eaa tare nite e aaa a aera hoen PaT Aa Eio sarees 411 Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes cccssseeeeees 417 oda ud evi sacvevevalth ck cyueetsoutuct A ceadeat tes cuwandta oat nedtsoutacteetstoue 421 870 USE 101 10 V 2 xiii Contents xiv 870 USE 101 10 V 2 About This Book Revision History This is version 2 0 of this manual 870 USE 101 1x which replaces 870 USE 101 Ox The following information has been added or changed Version Change 1 0 Never released 2 0 Addition of new Ethernet capable processors The most recent version of this manual is available on our web site www modicon com 870 USE 101 10 V 2 15 About
56. in the Peer Cop dialog box Result The Specific Output dialog box appears Cancel Hep Continued on next page 384 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Specifying References for Output Data Continued Procedure Continued Step Action Since you are addressing the device at address 3 you will use the line for Source 3 Type the value 400016 on that line in the Dest Ref column Specific Output x Range 400001 401872 1 32 _Dest Node Source Ref Length Bin BCD BN Type the value 1 in the Length column indicating that the device at address 3 will supply one word of data In this case we will leave the default BIN setting Specific Output x Range 400001 401872 1 32 Dest Node Source Ref Length Bin BCD Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 385 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Specifying References for Output Data Continued Procedure Continued Step Action Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the device at address 5 using the settings in the figure below Then click lt OK gt Specific Output x Dest Node Source Ref Length Bin BCD BN gt BIN 386 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Section 14 3 Passing
57. include a Processor Adapter or Option Adapter with a Modbus RS485 port Master Slave Slave Slave Slave Label Description Part Number 1 Terminating resistor plug 170 XTS 021 00 2 Modbus RS485 connector T DB9 base 170 XTS 040 00 3 Modbus RS485 Master Communication Cable 170 MCI 041 10 4 Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 Short Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 10 5 Modbus RS485 connector T RJ45 base 170 XTS 041 00 870 USE 101 10 V 2 125 Using the Modbus Ports Two Wire Cabling Schemes for Modbus RS485 Networks Introduction Two wire cabling schemes may be used for single master slave or multimaster slave communications Masters may be located anywhere in the network CAUTION MN POTENTIAL FOR MULTIMASTER CONFLICTS Configure a multimaster network carefully to avoid masters issuing simultaneous or conflicting commands to the same slave module Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Length The maximum length of cable from one end of network to other is 2000 ft 609 m Number of The maximum number of devices in a network is 64 if all are Momentum devices Devices Otherwise the maximum is 32 Termination One end of the cable run must be terminated with a terminating resistor color code is red The other end of the cable must be termi
58. ms 1 min To avoid timing out specify 0 If you specify a time after the specified time without a valid transaction the health bit will be reset to zero Rep Rate Use this column to specify how often in ms to repeat the transaction Valid values are 0 65 000 ms 1 min To repeat the transaction continually specify 0 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 351 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Configuring I O Continued Read Use the read function to read data from the slave to the master The Read Ref Slave column specifies the first address to be read The Read Count column specifies the number of registers to read The Read Ref Master column specifies the first address to read to Ethernet 1 O Scanner 171 CCC 960 20 984 z 26 7 32 54 U Ul 400U0U 128 7 32 54 129 732 54 CF Note For Ethernet modules the Read Ref Slave and Write Ref Slave always start with register 400001 Write Use the write function to write data from the master to the slave The Write Ref Master column specifies the first address to write The Write Count column specifies the number of registers to write The Write Ref Slave column specifies the first address to write to Ethernet I O Scanner Continued on next page 352 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU wi
59. oe a se ee 281 Devices on the Network cccesseeceeseeeeseeeeseeeeeesseeeseeeeeseseasessanesenerenenseeeess 282 Configuring a Node to Exchange Data ccecceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeneeeeeeetea 283 Confirming the Peer Cop Summary Information cceceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeetees 286 Specifying References for Input and Output Data ccecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 287 Defining the References for the Next Node eeesceeseeeseneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneees 292 Defining References for the Supervisory Computer ccescceeeeeeeeeeereeees 297 Completing the Configuration ecceeceeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeneees 302 Chapter 11 Saving to Flash in Modsoft cccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 303 Preparing to Save to Flash oo eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeesaeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaas 304 Saving to Flasha See el ech elt ad Nate ols a a A aoina 305 Part IV GONCODE arae Taraa elec Gece eee ee ee 307 Chapter 12 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept cccssseeteeeeeeees 309 Section 12 1 Configuring the Processor Adapter cceccececeseeeeneeeeeeeeseaeseeeeneeseaeeeeete 310 OVCINVIEW cai A E EEE ed Ah dette ed tala de cabana 310 Selecting an M1 Processor Adapter cecccesceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneessaeeeeeenates 311 Default Configuration Parameters cecceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeesneeeteeeteaeeeaes 315 Changing the Range of Discrete and Register R
60. of the following conditions The original M1 data frame was garbled corrupted and lost The target TCP IP stack is operating more slowly than the M1 retry rate For Modbus 502 servers the M1 initiates retries after 1 1 2 2 4 8 seconds For Modbus 502 clients the M1 retry rate is the larger of 1 4 the health timeout for Ethernet I O Scanner data see Accessing the Ethernet I O Scanner Screen on page 345 OR 4times the previous measured TCP IP round trip time for i o Scanner MSTR block Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 156 Using the Ethernet Port Description Continued Words 30 31 Late Collision Words 32 33 Lost Carrier Words 34 35 16 Collision Transmit Failure Increments when the transmit frame process is aborted because of late collision detected after the first 64 bytes of the frame was transmitted collision free This error could possibly occur if the Ethernet cable is intermittently connected and disconnected Increments whenever the Ethernet cable connected to the M1 is disconnected from the hub Also increments whenever the Ethernet cable connected to the hub is disconnected from the M1 Transmit frame process was aborted after 16 consecutive collisions The frame was not successfully transmitted out onto Ethernet link This error should never occur 870 USE 101 10 V 2 157 Using the Ethernet Port Section 5 2 Establishing a Connecti
61. or name OBus recognizes the InterBus identifier codes provided below and allows you to I O Map devices that use these codes However you cannot use the module zoom screens to define the parameters for these InterBus modules Identifier Code I O Type IOBUS 0101 One word discrete output IOBUS 0102 One word discrete input IOBUS 0103 One word bidirectional IOBUS 0201 Two word discrete output IOBUS 0202 Two word input IOBUS 0203 Two word bidirectional IOBUS 0231 Two word analog output IOBUS 0232 Two word analog input IOBUS 0233 Two word analog bidirectional Continued on next page 366 870 USE 101 10 V 2 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Concept Editing the I OBus I O Map Continued Generic InterBus Module Identifier Identifier Code 1 0 Type Codes Continued OBUS 0301 Three word discrete output IOBUS 0302 Three word input IOBUS 0303 Three word bidirectional IOBUS 0331 Three word analog output IOBUS 0332 Three word analog input IOBUS 0333 Three word analog bidirectional IOBUS 0401 Four word discrete output IOBUS 0402 Four word input IOBUS 0403 Four word bidirectional IOBUS 0431 Four word analog output IOBUS 0432 Four word analog input IOBUS 0433 Four word analog bidirectional IOBUS 0501 Five word discrete output IOBUS 0502 Five word input IOBUS 0503 Five word bidirectional IOBUS 0531 Five word analog
62. select Peer Cop from the Cfg Ext menu Note If Peer Cop is disabled in the pull down list you will need to specify enough extension memory to support your Peer Cop database before you can continue Extension memory is specified as a number of 16 bit words That number is entered in the ExtSize field of the Configuration Overview screen Once an adequate number of words has been specified there Peer Cop will be enabled in the Cfg Ext menu The minimum Peer Cop memory requirement is 20 words The maximum is 1366 words Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 259 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Accessing the Peer Cop Configuration Extension Screen Continued Estimating How Follow these guidelines for estimating the amount of extension memory you will Much Memory to need for your Peer Cop database Reserve For Add Up to a maximum of Overhead 9 words Global output 5 words Global input number of words 1088 words number of devices x 1 2 x number of device subentries Specific output 2 words for every device entry in Peer Cop 128 words Specific input 2 words for every device entry in Peer Cop 128 words 260 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft The Default Peer Cop Screen Overview Illustration Description This section describes the Peer Cop screen as it appears the first time you access it The first time yo
63. select Specials Result The cursor moves into the Battery Coil field on the Configuration Overview screen 2 Push the down arrow key twice to move the cursor into the Time of Day Clock field cs MS DOS Prompt bali a Ja al OQverView I OMap Ports Segmnts Loadable Cfo Ext Quit F 3 _F 4 __F 5 ___F 6 F f Lev 8 F8 OFF F3 CONFIGURATION OUERUIEW Size of Full Logic Area No of I 0 Map Words 01198 00512 PLC Type MOMNTUM Model M1 I 70 I O Type System Memory 2 4K Number of Segments Extended Memory K I O Map Reserved Words 512 MOMENTUM 3 Specials Battery Coil Timer Register Time of Day Clock Cfg Extension Used Size Ranges 01536 Oxxxx 1xxxx ic 4 000001 100001 3xxxx 300001 4XXXX 400001 4xxxx lt gt SFC 001536 aolol 4 300048 401872 Dupl Coils Start Oxxxx lt gt SFC Continued on next page 226 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Setting up the Time of Day Clock Continued Reserving Registers for the Step Action TOD Clock 3 Enter a number the first in a series of eight in the range of available 4xxxx Continued references Example If you want registers 400100 400107 reserved for the TOD clock enter 100 4 Push lt Enter gt Result The reference value you specified and the seven that follow it are now reserved for TOD clock data Specials Battery Coil 00153
64. sending eight words of specific output to the supervisor and that the M1 at Modbus Plus address 3 is sending 16 words of specific output to the supervisor The supervisor will receive this data as specific inputs We also know that the supervisor is sending 10 words of global data parts of which will be received by both of the M1 CPUs Make sure the Link setting is 1 and the Node setting is 2 indicating that the supervisory computer will exchange data with the CPU at address 2 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 297 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining References for the Supervisory Computer Continued Specifying We know that this M1 CPU sends eight words of specific output to the supervisor References for and receive five words of global data from the supervisor Node 2 Follow the steps in the table below to define the registers that the supervisor will transmit to and receive from the M1 CPU at Modbus Plus address 2 Step Action 1 In the REFERENCE column of the SPECIFIC INPUT field type the value 400001 the first register which will receive the input Push lt Enter gt Result The cursor moves to the LEN column OnError DelNode 6 7 PEER COP Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id i On Error CLEAR USED 1 OF 2666 WORDS Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT 400001 EE BIN SPECIFIC OUTPUT 7 GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL
65. the message Note e The formula above presumes that all MSTR blocks and all configured connections are set to go as fast as possible In this case the M1E will attempt to exchange data with each device once per scan e f several devices are configured to communicate on a timed basis that is substantially larger than the scan time calculated then the communications to those devices will be spread out over several scans See Example below You have 50 ENT modules connected to a single M1E with a configured time of 50 Msec each a total of 4k user logic and no MB card The scan time for all modules configured as fast as possible would be 12 5 Msec 0 52 Msec 0 40 Msec 13 42 Msec However since the M1E will only communicate to 1 4 of the modules 12 5 Msec 50 Msec 1 4 on any given scan the corrected average scan time would be 1 4 x 12 5 0 52 0 40 4 1 Msec 870 USE 101 10 V 2 59 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 980 30 Overview This section describes the 171 CCC 980 30 Processor Adapter including key features an illustration and specifications Note The 984LL exec used in the 171 CCC 980 30 will not operate in a cr Note The 171 CCC 980 30 units are shipped with the latest IEC exec installed CF 171 CCC 980 20 Key Features The key features of this Processor Adapter are Ethernet port Modbus Port 2 R8485 only 544K bytes of internal memory 50 MHz clock speed
66. the last seven words of global input from the supervisor Remember that the supervisor will be transmitting a total of 10 contiguous words of global data over the network Make sure that the Link setting is 1 and the Node setting is 1 indicating that this CPU will be exchanging data with the supervisory computer at address 1 Follow the steps in the table below to define the specific output in Peer Cop Step Action 1 In the REFERENCE column of the SPECIFIC OUTPUT field type the value 400024 Push lt Enter gt d SS e a aS aS a ae PEER COP Timeout 500 ms Total Links Link Id i in On Error CLEAR USED 1 OF 2666 WORDS Access to Node 1 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT T SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400024 E BIN GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT ol Continued on next page 292 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining the References for the Next Node Continued Defining Specific Outputs Continued Step Action 2 Type the value 16 in the LEN column of the SPECIFIC OUTPUT field Push lt Enters gt Weilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode Quit R1 E2 E3 F4 EFS F6 F Lev 8 F8 OFF F PEER COP Timeout 500 ms Total Links Link Id i On Error CLEAR USED 13 OF 2666 WORDS Access to
67. the network This process may require several minutes When the module is successfully communicating with these devices if a ring adapter with battery back up is not present it is recommended that you stop the processor and save the user program to flash This will save the processor s ARP cache and enable it to remember this information if power is lost or removed If you do not save to flash the processor must repeat acquiring the ARP cache information from the network This procedure should also be followed whenever Anew or substitute device is installed on the network The IP address of a network device has been changed CAUTION CONTROL NETWORKS MUST BE ISOLATED FROM MIS DATA NETWORKS To maintain a deterministic Ethernet network you must isolate Momentum Processor Adapters and related devices from MIS data networks Traffic from MIS data networks can interrupt communication between control devices causing your control application to behave unpredictably Additionally the high message rates that may be generated between M1 Processors and I O Adapters may bog down an MIS network causing loss of productivity Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 144 Using the Ethernet Port Network Design Considerations Continued I O Networks Supervisory Networks Combined Supervisory and I O Handling Concurrent Communi
68. the register allocation of the CPU PLC Memory Partition x Maximum State Memory 6144 State Memory Used 2538 State Memory Usage 41 r Discretes Discrete Inputs 1xxxx 512 Coils Oxxxx EE r Registers Input registers 3xxxx 48 Holding registers 4xxxx 1872 Cancel Hep 2 Modify the range of your discrete and register references by changing the value in the variable boxes in keeping with the guidelines described above 3 Click the lt OK gt button 870 USE 101 10 V 2 319 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Changing the Size of the Full Logic Area Introduction Example 1 Example 2 The number shown in the Available Logic Area field in the PLC Configuration screen indicates the total amount of memory available for your application logic You cannot directly enter this field to modify the value You can however change the amount of memory available by manipulating the size of other fields in the PLC Configuration screen For example if you reduce the expansion size of the I O Map the number in the Available Logic Area field automatically increases Say you are using a 12 2K machine and you change the size of the I O Map from 512 to 256 a decrease of 256 words The Available Logic Area will automatically increase from 1198 to 1454 Similarly if you allocate some number of words to the Peer Cop expansion size you will reduce the Available Logic Ar
69. to 7 870 USE 101 10 V 2 339 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Stop Bit Should Not Be Changed Changing Parity Introduction From the Modbus Port Setting screen a port can be configured for even odd or no parity checking The factory set default is EVEN parity Procedure To change the parity parameter perform the steps in the following table Step Action 1 Click on the down arrow under the Parity heading Result A menu appears with the three Parity choices Modbus Port Settings I Bridge Mode Baud Data bits Stop bits Parity Delay ms Address Mode Protocol 81 none Ho 1 RTU RS485 7 Odd Even Cancel Hep Click on the None Odd or Even entry Result The Modbus Port Settings dialog box is updated with the Parity type you have specified 340 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Changing the Delay Overview The Delay parameter is set to 10 ms and should be left at this value for most applications Do not change this parameter unless your application demands it If you must change this parameter you may select a value from 10 1000 ms in 10 ms increments Delay Timing If you use baud rates lower than 4800 adjust the delay timing as indicated in the following table Baud Rate Delay in Msec 2400 20 1200 30 600 50 300 100 Procedure Follow the s
70. to BIN push lt Enter gt twice Result The Peer Cop screen should like this Utilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode i F 1 F2 _F3 ___F 4 __F5 _ _ F6 _F L OF Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 1 OF 2666 WORDS Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT 400001 400008 8 BIN SPECIFIC OUTPUT ME GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT 400033 400042 16 BIN Complete the configuration by creating a Peer Cop screen from the supervisor that accesses node 3 and defines the references for that node 870 USE 101 10 V 2 301 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Completing the Configuration Overview Accessing Node 3 Specifying References for Node 3 To complete the configuration of the supervisory computer at Modbus Plus address 1 create a Peer Cop screen that accesses the CPU at address 3 and defines the references for that CPU Using the AddNode command create a new Peer Cop screen with a Link setting of 1 and a Node setting of 3 We know that this M1 CPU sends 16 words of specific output to the supervisor and receive seven words of global data from the supervisor Follow the steps in the table below to define the registers that the supervisor will transmit to and receive from the M1 CPU at
71. to observe this precaution can result in equipment damage 3 Push the Processor Adapter onto the Option Adapter gently pressing the locking tabs inward Result The locking tabs on each side of the Processor Adapter slide inside the Option Adapter and out through the locking slot The 12 pin and 34 pin connectors on the two units are mated to each other in the process Continued on next page 96 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Assembling Momentum Components Assembling a Processor Adapter and an Option Adapter Continued Next Step Follow the directions in the next section to mount the assembled adapters on the I O base 870 USE 101 10 V 2 97 Assembling Momentum Components Mounting the Assembled Adapters on the I O Base Overview This section gives guidelines safety precautions and a procedure for mounting the assembled Processor and Option Adapter on an I O base Guidelines The assembled adapters connect with the I O base at these seven points Two plastic snaps on the front of the Option Adapter fit into two slots on the front of the I O base The plastic snap extensions on the two sides of the Option Adapter fit into the two slots on the sides of the I O base The 12 pin connectors on the center of the back walls of the two units mate together The plastic stirrup on the back of the Option Adapter clips onto the bottom of the I O base CAUTION AN ELECTRICAL CIRCUITRY MAY BE E
72. to the minimum 17 in order to increase the size of the full logic area Default 32 words Minimum 17 words Continued on next page 220 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Size of the I O Map Continued Procedure From the Configuration Overview screen follow the steps below to change the size of the I O Map Step Action 1 From the Overview menu select I O Result The cursor will appear in the I O field of the editor on the number of segments Utilit OverView I OMap Ports Segmnts Loadable Cfg Ext Q Fi _F2 Y_F3 ___F 4 _F 5 _F6 _ F Lev OEE CONFIGURATION OVERU IEW Size of Full Logic Area 11532 PLC No of I 0 Map Words 66632 PLC Type MOMNTUM Model Mi Ivo 1 0 Type MOMENTUM System Memory 12 K Number of Segments i Extended Memory K I O Map Reserved Word Specials Ranges Battery Oxxxx 666061 001536 Timer Register 1xxxx 166061 166512 Time of Day Clock 3xxxx 366061 300048 Cfg Extension Used Size 4xxxx 400061 401872 4xxxx lt gt SFC None Dupl Coils Start G xxxx lt gt SFC 2 Push lt Enter gt Result The cursor moves to the I O Map Reserved Words field Modify the I O Map size by typing a new number in this field Push lt Enter gt 870 USE 101 10 V 2 221 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Establishing Configuration Extension Memory Introduction By default no memory spa
73. 0 25 msec ethernet device 0 002 msec word 0 13 msec K of logic 0 40 msec MBPlustime Note e Modbus Plus communications will slow the M1E If there is no MB ring card then MBPlustime 0 e If there is a MB ring card then each scan will be extended 0 3 Msec even if there is no message e Modbus Messages will add from 1 to 2 msec per scan depending on the length of the message Note e The formula above presumes that all MSTR blocks and all configured connections are set to go as fast as possible In this case the M1E will attempt to exchange data with each device once per scan e f several devices are configured to communicate on a timed basis that is substantially larger than the scan time calculated then the communications to those devices will be spread out over several scans See Example below You have 50 ENT modules connected to a single M1E with a configured time of 50 Msec each a total of 4k user logic and no MB card The scan time for all modules configured as fast as possible would be 12 5 Msec 0 52 Msec 0 40 Msec 13 42 Msec However since the M1E will only communicate to 1 4 of the modules 12 5 Msec 50 Msec 1 4 on any given scan the corrected average scan time would be 1 4 x 12 5 0 52 0 40 4 1 Msec 64 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum Option Adapters 2 At a Glance Purpose In This Chapter An Option Adapter can be inserted between the Processor Adapter
74. 00 171 COS ADATE OK Sc REN RIS Sane 8 i oN 319748108420 Mare n UEA cr rev o7 03 r nr Label Description 1 Modbus Port 1 connector Modbus Port 2 connector LED indicators Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 41 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCS 780 00 Continued LED Indicators Specifications This Processor Adapter has two LED indicators RUN and COM ACT Their functions are described in the table below LED Status Start up Both Single flash Indicates good health RUN Green On continuously when the CPU has received power and is Flashes an error pattern if the CPU is in kernel mode See Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes on page 417 Off CPU is not powered up or is not solving logic COM ACT Green May be on continuously or blinking Indicates activity on Modbus port 1 Off No activity on Modbus port 1 The following table contains specifications for the 171 CCS 780 00 Momentum M1 Processor Adapter Memory Internal Memory User Memory Flash RAM Clock Speed 984LL Input and Output References Registers Discretes 2048 any combination of 0x and 1x references IEC Input and Output References Registers Discretes 2048 any combination of 0x and 1x references I O Servicing Local I O Services all the points on any host Momentum I O base W
75. 1 Overview This section provides pinouts for the D shell adapters for Modbus Port 1 110 XCA 203 00 The pinout for this adapter is shown in the illustration below Pinout 110 XCA 203 00 9 pin Female Adapter CPU lt gt PC AT Pinouts RJ45 Connector _9 pin D shell pin 1 DTR 1 1 TXD 3 lt gt 2 RXD pin 9 RXD 4 lt _ 3 TXD DSR 2 4 DTR GND 5 5 GND AS screw RJ45 jack gt 6 DSR y reads 8x8 cts 7 lt gt 7 RTS S RTS 6 lt gt 8 CTS F cable 2 Al 14 8 lt _ case of shield the connector g S 4 50 8 mm 2 in pin 1 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 117 Using the Modbus Ports Pinouts for Modbus Port 1 Continued 110 XCA 204 00 The pinout for this adapter is shown in the illustration below Pinout 110 XCA 204 00 25 pin Female Adapter CPU lt gt PC XT Pinouts O RJ45 Connector _25 pin D shell oE pin 1 DTR 1 1 o9 RXD4 lt gt 2 TXD oe TXD3 lt gt 3 RXD 89 CTS 7 1 Es 4 RTS RTS 6 5 CTS Q o9 gt 6 DSR O i Jo 9 pin 25 GND 5 7 GND Q 8 DCD 4 40 jack F DSR 2 20 DTR RJ4 k Screws ea cable 8 gt 1 chassis shield round ao 9 if sit Tha ATT Bp lt q 39 6 mm gt 1 56 in pin 1
76. 10 OR Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 3 ft Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 36 5 Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 30 ft Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 80 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 189 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Cluster Mode Cabling Schemes Continued Cluster Scheme In this example two clusters are connected in sequence The network ends with 2 the second cluster n U SS SEO D Ee Es A G eS az EEE zz E E EEEEE CG C S35 Ea SS m J Label Description Part Number 1 Modbus Plus Tap 990 NAD 230 00 2 Modbus Plus 10 ft Drop Cable 170 MCI 021 20 3 Modbus Plus Connector T DB9 base 170 XTS 020 00 4 Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 Short Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 10 OR Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 3 ft Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 36 Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 30 ft Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 80 Terminating resistor plug 170 XTS 021 00 190 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Cable Accessories for Modbus Plus Networks Overview This section describes the cables connector and terminating device which should be used in constructing a Modbus Plus network for Momentum components Cable Within Cable for connecting two Modbus Plus devices within a cluster is available from Clusters Schneider Automation in two lengths These cables hav
77. 101 10 V 2 271 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Specifying References for Input Data Introduction The Peer Cop screen is now set to access the device at Modbus Plus address 2 which for this example is a 170 ADI 340 00 16 point input module This section explains how to specify the reference for input data from this module Device When you use Peer Cop to handle a Modbus Plus I O architecture you need to be Requirements aware of the type of I O you are configuring at each network address Peer Cop does not know that the device at address 2 is a discrete 16 point input module You need to know that a specific input reference with a length of one word 16 bits is required to handle this module We will assign a 3x register 300016 as a specific input to the CPU When the 170 ADI 340 00 sends input data to the CPU it will be sent to this register Continued on next page 272 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Specifying References for Input Data Continued Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to define the specific input in Peer Cop Step Action 1 Move the cursor to the REFERENCE column of the SPECIFIC INPUT field using the cursor arrow keys 2 Type the value 300016 in the REFERENCE column of the SPECIFIC INPUT field then push lt Enter gt Result The cursor moves into the LEN column of the SPECIFIC INPUT field tilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError D
78. 118 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Section 4 2 Modbus Port 2 Overview Purpose Five Momentum components offer this port 171 CCS 780 00 Processor Adapter 171 CCC 780 10 Processor Adapter 171 CCC 980 20 Processor Adapter 171 CCC 980 30 Processor Adapter 172 JNN 210 32 Serial Option Adapter This section describes the port and provides guidelines for Modbus RS485 networks In This Section This section contains the following topics Topics Page Modbus Port 2 120 Four Wire Cabling Schemes for Modbus RS485 Networks 123 Two Wire Cabling Schemes for Modbus RS485 Networks 126 Cable for Modbus RS485 Networks 129 Connectors for Modbus RS485 Networks 132 Terminating Devices for Modbus RS485 Networks 134 Pinouts for Modbus RS485 Networks 135 870 USE 101 10 V 2 119 Using the Modbus Ports Modbus Port 2 Two Types of Modbus Port 2 is available in two types Port Component Type of Port Type of Connector 171 CCS 780 00 Built in dedicated RS485 9 pin D shell connector 171 CCC 780 10 port 171 CCC 980 20 171 CCC 980 30 Processor Adapters 172 JNN 210 32 User may configure port as RJ45 phone jack connector Serial Option Adapter RS232 or RS485 If the Option Adapter is combined with the 171 CCS 780 00 or 171 CCC 780 10 171 CCC 980 20 or 171 CCC 980 30 Processor Adapter the Modbus port on the Option Adapter will be disabled
79. 40 Changing Parity ia aiaee panenna hanea er E araea EAA R En aE aa N ana aiina 340 Changing the Delay o x ivitein denna deena ne nee aeaa 341 Changing the Modbus Address ceccecceeeceeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeesseeeseeeeeaeeeaes 342 Changing the Protocol on Modbus Port 2 eeeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeeaeees 343 Section 12 4 Configuring Ethernet Address Parameters and I O Scanning eeee 344 OVEINVICW AE A A ea eee en ee ead 344 Accessing the Ethernet I O Scanner Screen cccesceeeceeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeneete 345 Ethernet Configuration Options cceeceseceeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 347 Setting Ethernet Address Parameters ccccesceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeneesaas 348 COMPIQ UTI O so ces esd iaae iera aeaaaee anaa e fedigesdeneaecneeaehinevicessies 350 Completing the I O Configuration ececeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeeaas 354 Section 12 5 I O Mapping the Local I O Points eeceeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeneeeaas 357 Accessing and Editing the O Map e ceceeseeeseeeeeeeeereseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeete 357 Chapter 13 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Concept 0 361 Supporting an I O Map for an I OBus Network ceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaes 362 Accessing an I O Map Screen for an I OBus Network cceeceeeeeeeees 363 Editing the I OBUS I O Maprani annn nen iaae 365 Chapter 14 Configuring a Modb
80. 5 141 Using the I OBus Port 6 171 Using the Modbus Plus Ports 7 181 870 USE 101 10 V 2 109 Communication Ports 110 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports At a Glance Purpose In This Chapter This chapter describes Modbus Port 1 and Modbus Port 2 including communication parameters cabling guidelines for Modbus RS485 networks cable accessories and pinouts This chapter contains the following sections For This Topic See Section On Page Modbus Port 1 1 112 Modbus Port 2 2 119 870 USE 101 10 V 2 111 Using the Modbus Ports Section 4 1 Modbus Port 1 Overview Purpose In This Section Modbus Port 1 is standard on all Momentum M1 Processor Adapters except the 171 CCC 960 20 and 171 CCC 980 20 171 CCC 960 30 and 171 CCC 980 30 ethernet adapters This section describes the port and recommended cable accessories and provides pinouts This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Modbus Port 1 113 Cable Accessories for Modbus Port 1 116 Pinouts for Modbus Port 1 117 112 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Modbus Port 1 Introduction Connector Type Illustration Modbus Port 1 is an RS232 asynchronous serial port that permits a host computer to communicate to the CPU for Programming Data transfer Upload
81. 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA RFI Susceptibility immunity Meets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Continued on next page 58 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 980 20 Continued Specifications Continued Scantime Formula for 984LL Exec C7 Example Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of protection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric strength Ethernet is isolated from logic common 500 VDC Ground continuity 30 A test on the exposed metal connector Agency Approvals e UL 508 CSA CUL CE e FMclass1 div2 The following formula applies to the M1E Processor Adapter with the 984LL exec Scan time 0 25 msec ethernet device 0 002 msec word 0 13 msec K of logic 0 40 msec MBPlustime Note e Modbus Plus communications will slow the M1E If there is no MB ring card then MBPlustime 0 e If there is a MB ring card then each scan will be extended 0 3 Msec even if there is no message e Modbus Messages will add from 1 to 2 msec per scan depending on the length of
82. 6 Timer Register Time of Day Clock 400100 400107 Cfg Extension Used Size 0 0 Next Step Setting the time 870 USE 101 10 V 2 227 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Setting the Time Overview Once you have reserved a block of registers for the time of day clock you have to set the correct time Modsoft offers two ways to do this using the Set Hardware Clock dialogue setting the register bits individually CF Note The time of day clock complies with guidelines for the year 2000 Option 1 You must be online or in combined mode to access the Set Hardware Clock dialogue Step Action 1 From the PlcOps menu select Set Hardware Clock Result The Set Hardware Clock dialogue appears 2 You may set the time directly or copy the current time setting from your programming panel e To set the time directly proceed to step 3 e To copy the setting from your programming panel proceed to step 4 3 The time setting for your programming panel is displayed on the left The controller time setting is displayed on the right The time is expressed as hh mm ss The date is expressed as mm dd yy e To modify the settings type a new value in the date or time field for the controller e To confirm the default settings or your modified settings press lt Enter gt 4 To copy the current time setting from your programming panel type Y in response to the question Write PANEL clock dat
83. 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Default Configuration Parameters Overview This section describes the default configuration parameters Defaults for a This sample PLC Configuration screen shows the default configuration parameters 2 4K Machine E PLC Configuration CE PLC Type 171 CSS 700 10 Available Logic Area 1297 Exec Id 898 Extended Memory Memory Size 2 46K Ranges Loadables Coils 000001 001536 Number installed 0 Discrete Inputs 100001 100512 Input Registers 300001 300048 Holding Registers 400001 401872 Specials Segment Scheduler Battery Coil Segments 1 Timer Register Time of Day Config Extensions Data Protection Disabled Peer Cop Disabled Hot Standby Not Applicable Ethernet Not Applicable Profibus DP Not Applicable Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 315 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Default Configuration Parameters Continued Defaults for a This sample PLC Configuration screen shows the default configuration parameters 12 2K Machine E PLC Configuration Tem PLC Type 171 CSS 760 00 IEC Available Logic Area 11121 Exec Id 899 Extended Memory Memory Size 12 29K Ranges Loadables Coils 000001 001536 Number installed 0 Discrete Inputs 100001 100512 Input Registers 300001 300048 Holding Registers 400001 401872 Specials Segment Scheduler Battery Coil Segm
84. 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Connectors for Modbus RS485 Networks Continued Connectors for Custom Cabling This RJ45 connector should be used when constructing custom cable for an RS485 network Description Part Number Illustration RJ45 Connector pack of 25 170 XTS 022 00 870 USE 101 10 V 2 133 Using the Modbus Ports Terminating Devices for Modbus RS485 Networks Overview This section describes terminating devices which should be used in constructing Modbus RS485 networks for Momentum devices Terminating Terminating resistor plugs are used with the RS485 connector RJ45 base at the Resistor Plugs last device on either end of a four wire cable network or at one end of a two wire cable network Description Part Number Illustration Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 Terminating RJ45 Resistor Plugs pack of 2 Color code red 170 XTS 021 00 Shunt Plugs Shunt plugs are used with the RS485 connector RJ45 base at one end of a two wire cable network The plug is used at the last device on the network Description Part Number Illustration Modbus RS485 Terminating RJ45 Shunt Plugs Color code blue 170 XTS 042 00 134 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Pinouts for Modbus RS485 Networks Overview This section contains pinouts for wiring an RS485 network for Moment
85. 95 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining the References for the Next Node Continued Defining Global Inputs Continued Next Step Step Action Type the value 4 inthe INDEX column of the GLOBAL INPUT field indicating that the M1 CPU at Modbus Plus address 3 will receive the seven words of global data starting with word 4 Result The Peer Cop screen is now set to send 16 words of specific output to the supervisor at Modbus Plus address 1 and to receive seven words of global data from the supervisor The screen should like this Utilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode eS Se PEER COP Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 18 OF 2666 WORDS Access to Node 1 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT i SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400024 400039 16 BIN GLOBAL INPUT 400001 400007 BIN 4 GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Defining references for the supervisory computer 296 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining References for the Supervisory Computer Overview Accessing Node 2 At this point we will attach the Modsoft 2 6 programming panel to the AT984 supervisory PLC at Modbus Plus address 1 and set up two Peer Cop screens to handle the M1 CPUs at addresses 2 and 3 We know that the M1 at Modbus Plus address 2 is
86. Adapter is assembled with a 171 CCS 780 00 Processor Adapter or a 171 CCC 780 10 Processor Adapter with built in Modbus Port 2 the Modbus Port 2 on the Option Adapter is electrically disabled The TOD clock and the battery backup on the Option Adapter remain functional If the RS232 port is chosen auto logout is supported If a programming panel is logged into the CPU via the serial port and its cable gets disconnected the Processor Adapter automatically logs out the port This auto logout feature is designed to prevent a lock up situation that could prevent other host stations from logging in on other ports Auto logout is not available for any RS485 port including the RS485 option on the Serial Option Adapter The user must log out of the processor using the programming software Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 69 Option Adapters Front Panel Components Continued Pinouts for Modbus Port 2 The 172 JNN 210 32 Serial Option Adapter uses the following pinouts Pin For RS232 For RS485 1 DTR RXD 2 DSR RXD 3 TXD TXD 4 RXD 5 signal common signal common 6 RTS TXD 7 CTS 8 cable shield cable shield 70 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Option Adapters Specifications Specifications This section provides the specifications for the 172 JNN 210 32 Momentum Serial Option Adapter Mechanical Weight 85 05 g 3 oz Dimensions HxDx
87. C o d Terminating Terminating resistor plugs are used with the connector T at the last device in a Resistor Plugs cluster when it is also the last device in the Modbus Plus network The plug is red Description Part Number Illustration Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 170 XTS 021 00 Terminating RJ45 Resistor Plugs pack of 2 870 USE 101 10 V 2 193 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Pinouts and Wiring Illustrations for Modbus Plus Networks Overview This section contains pinouts and wiring illustrations for constructing an Modbus Plus network for Momentum components Drop Cable from The following illustration shows wiring an interconnect cable with one RJ45 Tap to Cluster connector removed from a Modbus Plus tap to a cluster RED O crey GREY NOT y QUSED O o CABLE TIE CABLE SHIELD TIE BRAID Drop Cable from The following illustration shows wiring an interconnect cable with one RJ45 Cluster to Tap connector removed from a cluster to a Modbus Plus tap SHIELD TIE BRAID Continued on next page 194 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Pinouts and Wiring Illustrations for Modbus Plus Networks Continued Interconnect The following illustration shows the pinout for the 170 MCI 02x xx Modbus Plus or Cables Modbus RS485 Interconnect Cables 10 in 3 ft 10 ft and 30 ft RJ45 Connector RJ45 Connector TX
88. C 780 10 Processor Adapter the port is hardwired as a dedicated RS485 protocol However you must change the default setting on the Port editor screen from RS232 to RS485 or the port will not function From the Port editor screen perform the steps in the following table to change the Protocol on Modbus Port 2 Step Action 1 Place the cursor on the current Protocol entry for Modbus port 2 Push lt Enter gt Result A popup window appears in the top left corner of the screen displaying the two protocol options Fr Lev 8 F8 OFF F3 Bridge Mode N Number Mode Data Parity Stop Baud Head Slot Address Delay Protocol Bits Bits MODBUS 61 ASCII kd ODD 1 4800 8 247 10 ms 02 RTU 8 EUEN 1 9600 to 1 sce RS 232 2 Use an arrow key to toggle the cursor onto the desired protocol selection in the popup window then push lt Enter gt Result The Port editor screen is updated with the protocol you have specified 870 USE 101 10 V 2 241 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Section 8 4 I O Mapping the Local I O Points Accessing and Editing the I O Map Introduction Every M1 Processor Adapter is assembled on an I O base The I O points on the base are the local I O for that processor As part of the configuration process you need to create an I O Map for the local I O The I O Map assigns the appropriate range and type of Ox 1x 3x or 4x reference values from the CPU s state RAM to the
89. Data Protection Disabled Peer Cop Disabled Hot Standby Not Applicable Ethernet Not Applicable Profibus DP Not Applicable only be available if you have selected an M1 Processor Adapter with an Ethernet port OEGE Project Online Options Window Help PLCtype a ed Se LV a Memory partitions lol x ASCII setup PLC 80 20 984 Available Logic Area 17649 cael 3 Extended Memory Config extensions Segment scheduler IO map Loadables Peer cop Number installed 0 Data access protection Hot standby RTU extension ASCII port settings KEENE EE Segment Scheduler Segments 2 Specials Ethernet Config Extensions Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 345 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Accessing the Ethernet I O Scanner Screen Continued Ethernet Port If you have not previously modified any port parameters the following dialog box Default Settings will appear The dialog box shows the default parameters for the Ethernet port If you have previously modified any communication port parameters the new values will appear in the dialog box Ethernet I O Scanner 255 255 255 0 171 CCC 960 20 984 346 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Ethernet Configuration Options Overview Specify IP Address The Ethernet I O Scanner scree
90. E 101 10 Version 2 0 November 2000 Schneider Electric Document Set Momentum I O Bases User Guide 870 USE 002 00 Momentum Interbus Communication Adapter User Manual 870 USE 003 00 Momentum FIPIO Communication Adapter User Manual 870 USE 005 00 Momentum Ethernet Communciation Adapter User Guide 870 use 112 00 170 PNT Series Modbus Plus Communication Adapters for Momentum User Guide 870 USE 103 00 170 NEF Series Modbus Plus Communication Adapters for Momentum User Guide 870 USE 111 00 Preface Preface The data and illustrations found in this book are not binding We reserve the right to modify our products in line with our policy of continuous product development The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Schneider Electric Inc Schneider Electric Inc assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication please notify us through your distributor or local Square D office No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without express written permission of the Publisher Schneider Electric Inc CAUTION All pertinent state regional and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this product For reason
91. E E E E E aed Re eisai ec sede de ee ibeaetee 20 Front Panel illustrations tic ciate con ace eat eevee genre n een 21 Overview of Ports pieis rei nd eee ele rae arity 22 Memory and Performance Characteristics eccesseeeeeeeeeseeeeneeseeeeneees 24 PowerSupply iaisca cts wi ich ae A ed 27 Features of Each Processor Adapter ssceeesecteeseneeeeeneeeeeenneeeeenneeeseneeees 28 OVENMWIOW EE E A EA stec toxctecustederesstieassstde N E 28 171 CCS700 00 minnn ma a a a ete Pde A 29 171 CCS 700 10 srann e EN eats eee ee ena 32 171 CCS 760000 zinkaren a etaoin EAE A arent asbeaet eee 35 171 CCC760 TO conu sai See i E E 38 171 CCS 780 00 mingre a A EAE 41 17T CCC780 T0 innne i eE E eine ead 44 AEKA e0 E E EA A T R 47 IZT GOG 960 30 weiss a a a a A N EA aiia 51 V7 COG 980 20 EEEE TEETE ATAT 56 TW 7ilsGCG 980 302 22 hic sate ii BA hie Ua een eile 60 870 USE 101 10 V 2 vii Contents Chapter 2 Overview of Momentum Option Adapters ccee 65 Section 2 1 Introducing the Momentum Option Adapters cceeceesteeseeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeaes 66 Basic Features of Option Adapters ceececceeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeteaeeeneees 66 Section 2 2 Serial Option Adapter ececeececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeaeesaeseaeeesaeeeeeeneete 67 OVEMVIOW sits EA E A E E E E 67 Front Panel Components sssssssseeseesieeireeitettereetirtttttintttttntinstttnensttnennnenne 68 SPSCifications ENA EE E T E ET 71
92. Home Page Controller Status Displays the CPU Configuration page I O Status Displays the I O Status and Configuration page Support Displays contact information for technical assistance sales and feedback ES M1E Ethernet Statistics Netscape File Edit View Go Window Help El dlew Oe ao Oi Bookmarks Location http eio4 ethernet htm v Q What s relate MI ETHERNET STATISTICS Status topped MAC Address 000054101794 Reference IP Address 205 211 193 174 Firmware Version 1 04 Subnet Mask Host Name eld Gateway Address Transmit Statistics Receive Statistics Functioning Errors Transmits 64083 Receives 71956 Missed Packets 4 Transmit Retries 0 Framing Errors 0 Collision Errors 36 Lost Carrier 0 Overflow Errors 0 Transmit Timeouts 0 Late Collision 0 CRC Errors 0 Memory Errors 0 Transmit Buffer Errors 9 Out of server Paths Q Net Restarts 0 TCP Retries 7 Reset Counters Home Contoller Status _1 O Status Support Schneider Automation Inc 1998 2000 v1 0 Yr Document Done Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 168 Using the Ethernet Port Momentum M1E Web Pages Continued Support Page The Support page contains assistance information and the following links Link
93. INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Continued on next page 298 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining References for the Supervisory Computer Continued Specifying References for Node 2 Continued Step Action 2 Type the value 8 in the LEN column of the SPECIFIC INPUT field to indicate the number of registers that will be received Push lt Enter gt Result The REFERENCE field is completed automatically and the cursor moves to the TYPE column tilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode a a es ee Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 13 OF 2880 WORDS Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT 400001 400008 8 JN SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT 3 With the TYPE column of the SPECIFIC INPUT filed set to BIN push lt Enter gt twice Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 299 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining References for the Supervisory Computer Continued Specifying References for Step Action Node 2 4 Inthe REFERENCE column of the GLOBAL OUTPUT field at the bottom of the Continued screen type 400033 the first register which will be sent Push lt Enter gt
94. Instruction 411 870 USE 101 10 V 2 405 Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions Standard Ladder Logic Elements Introduction Ladder Logic This section provides a glossary of standard ladder logic symbols and instructions The table below provides the meaning of standard ladder logic symbols Symbols Symbol Meaning Nodes Consumed L Normally open N O contact 1 Je Normally closed N C contact 1 t Positive transitional P T contact 1 Negative transitional N T contact 1 Normal coil 1 Ay Memory retentive or latched coil the 1 Ly MY two symbols mean the same thing and the user may select the preferred version for online display Horizontal short 1 Vertical short 0 Continued on next page 406 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions Standard Ladder Logic Elements Continued Standard Ladder Logic Instructions The table below provides standard ladder logic instructions and their meaning Symbol Meaning Nodes Consumed Counter and Timer Instructions UCTR Counts up from 0 to a preset value 2 DCTR Counts down from a preset value to 0 2 T1 0 Timer that increments in seconds 2 TO0 1 Timer that increments in tenths of a second 2 T 01 Timer that increments in hundredths of a second 2 T1IMS A timer that increments in milliseconds 3 Integer
95. Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 10 Color code black 4 Modbus RS485 connector T RJ45 base 170 XTS 041 00 5 Terminating shunt plug 170 XTS 042 00 Color code blue Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 127 Using the Modbus Ports Two Wire Cabling Schemes for Modbus RS485 Networks Continued Single Master Slave Cabling The following illustration shows components used for single master slave communications in a two wire cabling scheme Each Momentum module must include a Processor Adapter or Option Adapter with a Modbus RS485 port Slave _ ESS Master Slave Slave Slave Label Description Part Number Terminating resistor plug Color code red 170 XTS 021 00 Modbus RS485 connector T DB9 base 170 XTS 040 00 Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 Short Interconnect Cable Color code black 170 MCI 020 10 Modbus RS485 connector T RJ45 base 170 XTS 041 00 Terminating shunt plug Color code blue 170 XTS 042 00 128 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Cable for Modbus RS485 Networks Overview This section describes the cables which should be used in constructing an RS485 network for Momentum components Master This cable is required for master slave
96. Modbus Plus address 3 Step Action 1 In the REFERENCE column of the SPECIFIC INPUT field type the value 400020 the first register which will receive the input Push lt Enter gt 2 Type the value 16 in the LEN column of the SPECIFIC INPUT field indicating the number of registers that will be received Push lt Enters gt 3 The GLOBAL OUTPUT fields should already be complete since you filled them out for node 2 The completed Peer Cop screen should look like this Go loRade AddNode lineout oniran De 1Node Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 19 OF 2666 WORDS Access to Node 3 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT 400020 400035 16 BIN SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT 400033 400042 16 BIN 302 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Saving to Flash in Modsoft 11 At a Glance Purpose In This Chapter You save data to Flash so that in the event of an unexpected loss of power the application logic and state RAM values will be preserved This section describes how to save the application logic and state RAM values to Flash using Modsoft 2 6 This chapter contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Preparing to Save to Flash 304 Saving to Flash 305 870 USE 101 10 V 2 303
97. Modbus Port 2 Step Action 1 Click on the down arrow under the Protocol heading Result A menu appears with the two protocol options Modbus Port Settings i I Bridge Mode __ Baud Data bits Stop bits Parity Delay ms Address Mode Protocol Ea 2 9600 81 Cancel Help Click on RS232 or RS485 Result The Modbus Port Settings dialog box is updated with the protocol you have specified 870 USE 101 10 V 2 343 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Section 12 4 Configuring Ethernet Address Parameters and I O Scanning Overview Purpose This section describes how to configure the Ethernet port using Concept 2 2 including IP address other address parameters and I O scanning In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Accessing the Ethernet I O Scanner Screen 345 Ethernet Configuration Options 347 Setting Ethernet Address Parameters 348 Configuring I O 350 Completing the I O Configuration 354 344 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Accessing the Ethernet I O Scanner Screen Introduction Ethernet address and I O scanning parameters can be modified using the Ethernet I O Scanner dialog box in Concept 2 2 How to Get There From the Configure menu select Ethernet I O Scanner This menu option will Concept untitled
98. Momentum M1 Processor Adapter and Option Adapter User Guide 870 USE 101 10 Version 2 4 Bp ee oe Rec cesacecece s R tl ge 8 a4 gt a om wm oo alt BET W Telemecanique Schneider dp Electric Data Illustrations Alterations Data and illustrations are not binding We reserve the right to alter products in line with our policy of continuous product development If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication please notify us by e mail at techcomm modicon com Training Schneider Electric Inc offers suitable further training on the system Hotline See addresses for Technical Support Centers at the end of this publication Trademarks All terms used in this publication to denote Schneider Electric Inc products are trademarks of Schneider Electric Inc All other terms used in this publication to denote products may be registered trademarks and or trademarks of the corresponding corporations Copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including copying processing or by online file transfer without permission in writing from Schneider Electric Inc You are not authorized to translate this document into any other language 2000 Schneider Electric Inc All rights reserved Momentum M1 Processor Adapter and Option Adapter User Guide 870 US
99. Note You can use Concept s Setting the Time feature or use the following procedure to set the time 870 USE 101 10 V 2 333 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Setting the Time Overview CF Setting the Status Bits Once you have reserved a block of registers for the time of day clock you have to set the correct time With Concept you must go online and set the register bits individually using the following guidelines for setting the status bits and setting the time bits The CPU must be running Note The time of day clock complies with guidelines for the year 2000 The control register 4x uses its four most significant bits to report status Control Register 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 error 1 All clock values have been set 1 Clock values are being read 1 Clock values are being set CF Setting the Time Bits Note The time of day clock sets itself to zero when it resets while it is running The following table shows how the registers handle time of day clock data where register 4x is the first register in the block reserved for the clock Register Data Content 4x The control register 4x 1 Day of the week Sunday 1 Monday 2 etc 4x 2 Month of the year Jan 1 Feb 2 etc 4x 3 Day of the month 1 31 4x 4 Year 00 99 4x 5 Hour in militar
100. Peer Cop of the CPU defines all the communication transactions over the full network A supervisory network with two or more CPUs communicating with each other and with additional devices on the network In This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections For This Topic See Section On Page Getting Started 1 258 Using Modbus Plus to Handle I O 2 263 Passing Supervisory Data over Modbus Plus 3 281 870 USE 101 10 V 2 257 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Section 10 1 Getting Started Overview Purpose In This Section This section explains how to access the Peer Cop Configuration Extension screen and describes the default screen This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Accessing the Peer Cop Configuration Extension Screen 259 The Default Peer Cop Screen 261 258 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Accessing the Peer Cop Configuration Extension Screen Introduction Accessing the Screen CF Adjusting Extension Memory Extension Memory Size Before you can access the Peer Cop Configuration Extension screen you must have specified enough extension memory to support your Peer Cop database This section describes how to access the screen and if necessary adjust the amount of configuration extension memory Starting from the Configuration Overview screen
101. Procedure continued Step Action Type the module s IP network address or host name in the IP Address box Remote IP Address x IP Address ema Click on the OK button This dedicates a connection from your PC to the designated Ethernet module and brings you to the main menu Network Options Ethernet Tester ElIO2 Eile View Management Messages Window Help DI Je 3 03 0 5 Connected to El02 You may establish several connections with the same module or with other modules by repeating step 2 for each new connection Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 160 Using the Ethernet Port Establishing a Connection with an Ethernet Module continued Procedure continued Step Action from the pulldown menu Network Options Ethe File View PET aj 3 I Connect Disconnect Set P Addr or click on the disconnect button in the toolbar When you are ready to disconnect select Management and choose Disconnect by selecting Management and choosing Set IP Addr from the pul gt Network Options Ether After disconnecting from one module you may reassign its dedicated connection Type the new IP network address or host name in the box provided Idown menu 870 USE 101 10 V 2 161 Using the Ethernet Port Section 5 3 Accessing Embedded Web Pages Overview In
102. Ref Description i 170 ADI 356 46 P 32 dg 24udc inp 02 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Enter the desired reference number in this case a 3x register 300020 which will be the first of two contiguous input registers for the 32 bit input base The second register is automatically assigned Procedure Continued Step 2 3 4 Move the cursor to the Module column opposite NODE 02 and push lt Shift gt lt gt Result The base module selection popup appears again over the I O Map screen Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 253 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Modsoft Editing the I OBus I O Map Continued Procedure Continued Step Action 5 Continue to select and map modules one after the other You must enter the modules in contiguous node slots on the screen e g you cannot enter a module in slot 7 if you have not filled slot 6 Utilit ClrDrop Drop Insert Quit 1 __ F2 _ F3 _F 4 __ F5 _F6 F Lev 8 F8 OFF F MOMENTUM Type IOBUS Drop 1 Available 196 Used I0 Points 166 of 2648 PAGE NODE Module Input Ref Output Ref Description 170 ADI 356 A 366016 300011 32 dg 24udc inp 170 ADI 346 AA 300012 300012 16 dg 24vdc inp 170 AMM 090 AA 300013 300017 400010 400014 4i 20 anl 4i 20 dg 170 ADO 546 56 400015 400015 16 dg 115vac out 170 ADM 696 5 300018 300018 466616 460616 1 in 8out 115vac ee
103. SPECIFIC INPUT 300017 300018 2 BIN SPECIFIC OUTPUT ME GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT w CF Note The lengths LEN for the 32 bit I O devices at addresses 4 and 5 need to be specified as 2 words 32 bits Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 279 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Completing the I O Device Configuration in Peer Cop Continued Completed The completed Peer Cop screen for node 5 should look like this Screen Node 5 GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError _DelNode LE pm ee ee 3 io PEER COP Timeout 246 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error HOLD USED 21 OF 1366 WORDS Access to Node 5 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400017 400018 2 BIN GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT CF Note The lengths LEN for the 32 bit I O devices at addresses 4 and 5 need to be specified as 2 words 32 bits 280 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Section 10 3 Passing Supervisory Data over Modbus Plus Overview Purpose This Peer Cop example deals with a network where three CPUs communicate over Modbus Plus Each device needs its own Peer Cop configuration In This Section This section contains t
104. Special STAT Instruction Continued Words 1 12 Continued Word Description 7 Displays the address of the end of logic EOL pointer 1 2 3 415 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 EOL Pointer Address 8 and 9 Not used 10 Uses its two least significant bits to display RUN LOAD DEBUG status lf the bit i 1 ition is T V2 S EAE n7 8 e ao a Ae 14 18 16 TT Debug 0 0 Run 0 1 Load 1 0 11 Not used 12 Indicates the health of the ATI module If the bit is set to 1 then the condition is TRUE LE 31 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 ATI healthy 0 ATI Not Healthy Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 415 Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions A Special STAT Instruction Continued Words 13 20 Words 13 20 are available only for the 171 CCS 760 00 and 171 CCS 760 10 Momentum M1 Processor Adapters to indicate the status of I OBus modules controlled over the I O Bus network This Word Indicates the Status of These I O Modules 13 1 16 14 17 32 15 33 48 16 49 64 17 65 80 18 81 96 19 97 112 20 113 128 416 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes B Run L7ED Flash The fo
105. Supervisory Data over Modbus Plus Overview Purpose This Peer Cop example deals with a network where three CPUs communicate over Modbus Plus Each device will need to have its own Peer Cop configuration In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Devices on the Network 388 Specifying References for Input and Output Data 389 Defining the References for the Next Node 393 Defining References for the Supervisory PLC 396 870 USE 101 10 V 2 387 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Devices on the Network Introduction This section describes the three CPUs which exchange data over the sample Modbus Plus network and the strategy used to assign node addresses Devices The three CPUs and their functions are described in the following table MB Address CPU Function 1 Pentium supervisory computer with an Receives specific input data ATRIUM 180 CCO 111 01 host based and sends global outputs PLC card 2 171 CCS 760 00 Momentum M1 Controls I OBus network Processor Adapter with and exchanges data with 172 PNN 210 22 Modbus Plus Option ATRIUM supervisor Adapter 3 171 CCS 760 00 Momentum M1 Controls I OBus network Processor Adapter with and exchanges data with 172 PNN 210 22 Modbus Plus Option ATRIUM supervisor Adapter Address In this type of architecture assign the lowest network address 1 to
106. Switches 100 m Unlimited Unlimited CF Note 10 100 hubs switches can be used This will allow 100 Base T networks to use the M1E Cabling with The following illustration shows the maximum number of hubs and the maximum Traditional Hubs cable length between devices when using traditional non switching hubs Cabling with Traditional Hubs ag 500m 1630 ft Maximum Cable Length Within the Same Collision Domain M1E M1E ci ta OOOO OC0O00 sie Hub Hub a I O Device O Device I O Device I O Device 870 USE 101 10 V 2 147 Using the Ethernet Port Pinouts Overview RJ45 Pinout This section contains pinouts for wiring an Ethernet network for Momentum components The illustration below shows the pinouts for wiring an RJ45 connector for Ethernet LT pin 1 Pin Function 1 TXD 2 TXD 3 RXD 4 5 6 RXD 7 8 Note These are industry standard pinouts Prefabricated patch cables can be used 870 USE 101 10 V 2 148 Using the Ethernet Port Assigning Ethernet Address Parameters Overview As shipped from the factory the M1 Eth
107. T MC Exec Pack QBUS System Memory 2 UME Extended Memory 351 Redundant 455 DCP Drop ID B984 QUANTUM MICRO Ranges z MOMNTUM A Bxxxx 66001 61536 COMPACT B 1xxxx 16061 10512 MICRO K 3xxxx 30001 30048 4xxxx 40001 41872 4xxxx lt gt SFC None GELO G E Number of Messages Dupl Coils Start B Message Area Size Number of ASCII Ports xxxx lt gt SFC Simple ASCII Output Simple ASCII Input 3 Move the cursor onto MOMNTUM and push lt Enter gt Result You will be prompted to select between the M1 Processor type and the Magnum Utilit OverView I OMap Ports Segmnts _Loadable Quit Fi F5 Ft F Lev 8 F8 OFF F CONFIGURATION OVERU IEW Size of Full Logic Area 63107 PLC 170 Map Words 60615 PLC Type 984 _ MOMNTUM Exec Pack System Memory 7 of Segments Extended Memory IO Drops Channel Pairs Redundant 170 Modules DCP Drop ID Specials Ranges 3 Battery Coil xxxx 66661 61536 Timer Register 1xxxx 16601 10512 Time of Day Clock 3xxxx 30001 30048 ox 40001 41872 4xxxx lt gt SFC None GETH G E Number of Messages Dupl Coils Start Message Area Size Number of ASCII Ports xxxx lt gt SFC Simple ASCII Output Simple ASCII Input 4 Place the cursor on M1 and push lt Enter gt Continued on next page 208 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Selecting an M1 Processor Adapter Continued Next Step You are now ready to specify the type of M1 Mom
108. This Book About Book Document Scope Validity Note Related Documentation User Comments This manual contains complete information about the Momentum M1 Processor Adapters Option Adapters and Ethernet Adapters It does not contain information about Momentum I O bases or Communication Adapters This manual is valid for Modsoft 2 6 1 and Concept 2 2 You may find the following other manuals useful Title Part Number Momentum I O Bases User Guide 870 USE 002 00 Momentum Modbus Plus PNT Series Communication Adapters User Guide 870 USE 103 00 Momentum Modbus Plus NEF Series Communication Adapters User Guide 870 USE 111 00 Quantum NOE 771 x0 Ethernet Modules User Guide 840 USE 116 00 FactoryCast User s Guide For Quantum and Premium 890 USE 152 00 Momentum Interbus Communication Adapter User Manual 870 USE 003 00 Momentum Ethernet Communication Adapter User Guide 870 USE 112 00 We welcome your comments about this document You can reach us by e mail at techcomm modicon com 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Getting Started At a Glance Purpose In This Part This part describes the M1 Processor Adapters and Option Adapters and explains how to assemble them This part contains the following chapters For Information On See Chapter On Page Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 1 19 Over
109. USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Standard Cabling Schemes Introduction Length Distance Between Nodes Number of Devices Termination In a standard Modbus Plus cabling scheme each peer device connects via a drop cable to a tap along a trunk cable The maximum length of cable from one end of the network to the other is 1500 ft 450 m if no repeaters are used You can use up to three Modicon RR85 Repeaters to extend the cable to up to 6000 ft 1800 m Each repeater allows you to extend the cable 1500 ft 450 m Description Part Number Modicon RR85 Repeater NW RR85 000 Nodes must be separated by at least 10 ft of cable This requirement is more than satisfied by standard drop cables Description Part Number Modbus Plus Drop Cable 2 4 m 8 ft 990 NAD 211 10 Modbus Plus Drop Cable 6 m 20 ft 990 NAD 211 30 The maximum number of devices in a network is 64 lf you use only Momentum products you may use up to 64 devices on one cable section without a repeater lf you use a mixture of devices you may use up to 32 devices on one cable section You must use a repeater to connect to another cable section You may use up to three repeaters and four cable sections in all You must terminate both ends of the network If your network consists of two or more sections separated by a repeater each section must be terminated at both ends Conti
110. W 58 3 on battery side x 60 6 x 143 1mm 2 27 x 2 36 x 5 57 in Material Enclosures bezels Lexan Time of Day Clock Accuracy 13 s day Batteries Type AAA alkaline two required two included with Option Adapter in separate package Service life lt 30 days from the time a battery low indication is received to actual battery failure 40degrees C maximum ambient temperature with the system continuously powered down Shelf life In excess of 5 yr room temperature Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interactions Enclosures and bezels are made of Lexan a polycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 71 Option Adapters Specifications Continued Specifications Continued RFI Susceptibility immunity Meets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of pro
111. With a new Configuration Overview editor on the screen move the cursor onto the OverView selection on the top menu bar Result A pull down list of options appears OverView I 0Map Ports Segmnts Loadable Cfg Ext Quit i F6 FF Lev F8 0FF F OVERU I EY Size of Full Logic Area 63107 PLC I7 of 170 Map Wor 60015 PLC Type Exec Pack 1 0 Type ALENG Reset Default lumber of Segments 1 STG EET SFC ON I0 Drops Channel Pairs Redundant SFC OFF 170 Modules al DCP Drop ID Duplicate Coils Specials Ranges 5 Battery xxxx 666601 61536 Timer Register 1xxxx 16661 10512 Time of Day Clock 3xxxx 30001 30048 4XxXXX 40001 41872 4xxxx lt gt SFC None GETH G E Number of Messages Dupl Coils Start Message Area Size Number of ASCII Ports xxxx lt gt SFC Simple ASCII Output Simple ASCII Input PLC Type displays the currently available PLCs for user selection Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 207 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Selecting an M1 Processor Adapter Continued Procedure Continued Step Action 2 Move the cursor onto PLC Type in the pull down list and push lt Enter gt Result The following list of PLC types appears on the screen Utilit OverView I OMap Ports Segmnts _Loadable Qu a _F2 _ F3 ____F 4 F5 CONFIGURATION OUERUIEW Size of Full Logic Area 63107 PLC 6 PLC Type 984 A
112. XPOSED Electrical circuitry on the I O base may be exposed when an adapter is not mounted Be sure that the I O base is not under power whenever it does not have a Momentum adapter mounted on it To be sure that power is not present do not insert the wiring connectors to the I O base until after the adapter has been mounted When more than one connector is on the I O base remove all connectors to prevent the unit from receiving power from an unexpected source Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage and will void the product warranty Continued on next page 98 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Assembling Momentum Components Mounting the Assembled Adapters on the I O Base Continued Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to mount the assembly on an I O base Mounting the Assembled Step Action Adapters on an 1 Be sure that the I O base is not under power when you assemble the module I O Base 2 Align the four plastic snap extensions on the front and sides of the Option Adapter with the slots on the I O base The 12 pin connectors will automatically line up when the units are in this position The devices should be oriented so their communication ports are facing out on the back side of the assembly Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 99 Assembling Momentum Components Mounting the Assembled Adapters on the I O Base Continued
113. __F3 ____F 4 F5 _ F6 _ F Lev 8 F8 O0FF F CONFIGURATION OVERUIEW Size of Full Logic Area 11532 PLC No of I 0 Map Words 66632 PLC Type MOMNTUM Model Mi Ivo 1 0 Type MOMENTUM System Memory 12 K Number of Segments 1 Extended Memory K I70 Map Reserved Words Specials Ranges Battery Coil xxxx 666061 1341536 Timer Register 1xxxx 166061 166512 Time of Day Clock 3xxxx 366061 300048 Cfg Extension Used Size 4xXxXX 400061 401872 4xxxx lt gt SFC None Dupl Coils Start xxxx lt gt SFC 2 Modify the range of your discrete and register references by changing the high value in keeping with the guidelines described above Press lt Enter gt after completing each field 216 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Size of Your Application Logic Space Introduction Example 1 Example 2 The number shown in the Size of Full Logic Area field in the Configuration Overview screen indicates the total amount of memory available for your application logic You cannot directly enter this field to modify the value You can however change the amount of memory available by manipulating the size of other fields in the Configuration Overview screen If you reduce the size of the I O Map area the number in the Full Logic Area field automatically increases Say you are using a 12 0K machine and you change the size of the
114. a to PLC Y N Then press lt Enter gt Continued on next page 228 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Setting the Time Continued Option 2 Setting the Status Bits Setting the Time Bits Go online and set the register values individually using the following guidelines and procedure for setting the status bits and setting the time bits The CPU must be running while you are setting the bits The control register 4x uses its four most significant bits to report status Control Register 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 error 1 All clock values have been set 1 Clock values are being read 1 Clock values are being set The following table shows how the registers handle time of day clock data where register 4x is the first register in the block reserved for the clock Register Data Content 4x The control register 4x 1 Day of the week Sunday 1 Monday 2 etc 4x 2 Month of the year Jan 1 Feb 2 etc 4x 3 Day of the month 1 31 4x 4 Year 00 99 4x 5 Hour in military time 0 23 4x 6 Minute 0 59 4x 7 Second 0 59 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 229 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Setting the Time Continued Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to set the re
115. address test error 052D P O S T BAD MPU ERROR 6 0402 ram data test error Continued on next page 418 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes Run LED Flash Pattern and Error Number of Blinks Code hex Error Codes Continued 7 0300 EXEC not loaded 0301 EXEC Checksum 8 8001 Kernal prom checksum error 8003 unexpected exec return 8005 Flash program erase error 8007 Watchdog timeout event 870 USE 101 10 V 2 419 Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes 420 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Index Numerics 171 CCC 760 10 Processor Adapter diagram 38 key features 38 LEDs 39 specifications 39 171 CCC 780 10 Processor Adapter changing protocol to RS485 241 diagram 44 key features 44 LEDs 45 need to change protocol to RS485 122 specifications 45 171 CCS 700 00 Processor Adapter diagram 29 key features 29 LEDs 30 specifications 30 171 CCS 700 10 Processor Adapter diagram 32 key features 32 LEDs 33 specifications 33 171 CCS 760 00 Processor Adapter diagram 35 key features 35 LEDs 36 specifications 36 171 CCS 780 00 Processor Adapter changing protocol to RS485 241 diagram 41 key features 41 LEDs 42 need to change protocol to RS485 122 specifications 42 172 JNN 210 32 Serial Option Adapter diagram 68 LED indicator 69 limitations when used with certain processor adapters 120 specification
116. alue in the popup is 1 Push lt Enters gt Result The Link value is set to 1 and the cursor moves to the Node field Utilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError 1 _ F2 _ __F3 _ __F _Fs _ _ _F6 F Lev 8 F8 OFF F PEER COP Timeout ms Total Links Link Id On Error USED 1 OF WORDS Access to Node MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT ra SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT dd Node GLOBAL INPUT Link 1 GLOBAL INPUT Node Hi TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT 7 Enter the value 2 in the Node field i GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError FA _F 2 __F3 __F 4 __F5 F6 F Lev 8 F8 OFF F PEER COP Timeout ms Total Links Link Id On Error USED 1 OF WORDS Access to Node MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT dd Node GLOBAL INPUT Link 1 GLOBAL INPUT Node R TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Continued on next page 266 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining the Link and Accessing a Node Continued Procedure Continued Next Step Step Action Push lt Enter gt Result The Add Node popup disappears and the Peer Cop summary information values are
117. ashes an error pattern if the CPU is in kernel mode See Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes on page 417 Off CPU is not powered up or is not solving logic COM ACT Green May be on continuously or blinking Indicates activity on Modbus port 1 Off No activity on Modbus port 1 Specifications The following table contains specifications for the 171 CCC 780 10 Momentum M1 Processor Adapter Memory Internal Memory 512K bytes User Memory 18K words 984LL Exec 240k words IEC Exec Flash RAM 512K bytes Clock Speed 32 MHz 984LL Input and Output References Registers 26048 Discretes 8192 Ox references 8192 1x references IEC Input and Output References Registers 26048 Discretes 8192 Ox references 8192 1x references I O Servicing Local I O Services all the points on any host Momentum I O base Watchdog timeout 262 ms Logic solve time 0 16 ms k ladder logic instructions 870 USE 101 10 V 2 45 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 780 10 Continued Specifications Continued Mechanical Weight 42 5 g 1 5 oz Dimensions HxDxW 25 9x61 02x125mm 1 01 x 2 37 x 4 86 in Material Enclosures bezels Lexan Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interactions Enclosures and bezels are made of Lexan a pol
118. atchdog timeout Logic solve time 0 25 ms k ladder logic instructions Continued on next page 42 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCS 780 00 Continued Specifications Continued Mechanical Weight 42 5 g 1 5 02 Dimensions HxDxW 25 9x61 02x125mm 1 01 x 2 37 x 4 86 in Material Enclosures bezels Lexan Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interactions Enclosures and bezels are made of Lexan a polycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA RFI Susceptibility immunity Meets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of protection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric strength RS232 and RS485 are non isolated from logic common Ground continuity 30 A test on the exposed metal c
119. bezels are made of Lexan a polycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA RFI Susceptibility immunity Meets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Continued on next page 54 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 960 30 Continued Specifications Continued Scantime Formula for 984LL Exec CF Example Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of protection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric strength Ethernet is isolated from logic common 500 VDC Ground continuity 30 A test on the exposed metal connector Agency Approvals e UL 508 CSA CUL CE e FMclass1 div2 The following formula applies to the M1E Processor Adapter with the 984LL exec Scan time 0 25 msec ethernet device 0 002 msec word 0 13 msec K of logic 0 40 msec MBPlustime Note e Modbus Plus communications will slow the M1E If there is no MB ring card then
120. blishing Configuration Extension Memory for Peer Cop 324 310 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Selecting an M1 Processor Adapter Introduction cr Procedure This section describes how to select an M1 Processor Adapter for a new project using Concept 2 2 Note For a full description of Concept refer to the set of manuals shipped with the software Follow the steps below to select an M1 Processor Adapter for a new project Step Action 1 From the File menu select New Project Result A new project is opened and the file name untitled appears over the menu bar 2 From the Project menu select Configurator PLC Configuration Result The PLC Configuration screen appears PLC Type Available Logic Area Exec Id Extended Memory Memory Size Ranges Loadables Coils Number installed Discrete Inputs Input R egisters Holding Registers Specials Segment Scheduler Battery Coil Segments Timer Register z Time of Day Config Extensi ASCII Data Protection Number of Messages Peer Cop Mesage Area Size Hot Standby Number of Ports Ethernet n Profibus DP LE Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 311 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Selecting an M1 Processor Adapter Continued Procedure Continued Step Action From the Config
121. bus Plus address 1 Step Action 1 Click on the Global Input button Result The Global Input dialog box appears 2 Since this device will be receiving data from the CPU at address 1 you do not need to change the default sending address selected under the heading 1 64 Type 4000071 in the Dest Ref column on the first line to indicate the first register the CPU will use to store the input data 3 Type the value 4 in the Index column indicating that the CPU will receive part of the global input data beginning with the fourth word 4 Type the value 7 in the Length column indicating that the CPU will accept seven words of the global input data Leave the default BIN setting 1 64 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 x Clear Subfields 5 Click lt OK gt Next Step Defining references for the supervisory PLC 870 USE 101 10 V 2 395 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Defining References for the Supervisory PLC Overview Defining the Specific Inputs At this point we will attach the Concept 2 1 programming panel to the ATRIUM 180 CCO 111 01 supervisory PLC at Modbus Plus address 1 and set up Peer Cop screens to handle the M1 CPUs at addresses 2 and 3 We know that the M1 at Modbus Plus address 2 is sending eight words of specific output to the supervisor and that the M1 at Modbus Plus address 3 is sending 16 words of specific output to the supervisor The supervisor will receive this data as specific
122. c Elements and Instructions A Special STAT Instruction Continued Words 1 12 Continued Word Description 5 Displays the PLC s stop state conditions If the bit is set to 1 then the condition is TRUE CPU Logic Solver Failed for chassis mount controllers or Coil Use Table for other controllers If the bit 1 in a chassis mount controller the in i ternal diagnostics have detected a CPU failure If Invalid Node the bit 1 in any controller other than a chassis A mount then the Coil Use table does not match the Logic checksum coils in user logic Coil Disabled in RUN Mode Bad Config 1 2 3 41 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Real Time Clock Error Watchdog Timer Expired Bad number of I O modules on I OBus or End of Logic Nodes State RAM Test Failed Start of Node Did Not Start Segment Segment Scheduler Invalid Illegal Peripheral Intervention Controller in DIM AWARENESS Error in the I O Map Peripheral Port Stop 6 Displays the number of segments in ladder logic a binary number is shown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Number of Segments expressed as a binary number Continued on next page 414 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions A
123. cation In an Ethernet I O network architecture an M1 Processor Adapter is used to control Momentum I O points equipped with an Ethernet Communication Adapter or other Modbus over TCP IP Ethernet aware devices Communication between these devices should be isolated not only from MIS data traffic but also from unrelated communication between other control devices You may isolate communication by creating a separate network or by using switches In a supervisory architecture several intelligent processing devices share system data with each other Many kinds of devices may be part of the network You should be aware of each device s requirement for access to the network and of the impact each device will have on the timing of your network communication If your system requires both supervisory and I O handling architectures one solution is to use the I OBus capabilities of the 171 CCC 960 20 Processor Adapter for the I O network and the Ethernet capabilities for the supervisory network If you intend to use Ethernet to handle both functions use switches to isolate the network traffic and supply additional buffering of network packets A maximum of 96 devices may be communicating with the Processor Adapter via the Ethernet at any one time This 96 device limit consists of up to 2 programming panels one must be in monitor mode upto 14 general purpose Modbus server paths upto 16 MSTR elements which support Modbus rea
124. cations Only one master is allowed The master may be located anywhere in the network The maximum length of cable from one end of network to other is 2000 ft 609 m The maximum number of devices in a network is 64 if all are Momentum devices Otherwise the maximum is 32 You must terminate both ends of the cable run with special terminating resistors Description Part Number Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 Terminating RJ45 Resistor Plugs 170 XTS 021 00 pack of 2 Color code red The master of this master slave cabling scheme must be connected on at least one side to a master cable a special cable that crosses the transmit and receive lines The other side may be connected to a master cable or if the master is at one end of the cable run a terminating resistor Description Part Number Modbus RS485 RJ45 RJ45 Master Communication Cable 170 MCI 041 10 Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 Terminating RJ45 Resistor Plugs 170 XTS 021 00 pack of 2 Color code blue Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 123 Using the Modbus Ports Four Wire Cabling Schemes for Modbus RS485 Networks Continued Slave Cabling The slaves use a pin for pin cable such as the Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 Short Interconnect Cable or any Cat 5 4 Twisted Pair Ethernet cable AWG 24 Description Part Number Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 Short Interconnect Cable Color code
125. ce is allocated for configuration extension memory If you want to use the Peer Cop capability to handle Modbus Plus communications you need to define some configuration extension memory to enable Peer Cop Extension memory is specified as a number of 16 bit words That number is entered in the Ext Size entry of the Configuration editor Once an adequate number of words has been specified here Peer Cop will be enabled in the CfgExt pull down list How Much The minimum Peer Cop Ext Size memory requirement is 20 words the maximum Memory is 1366 words Follow these guidelines for estimating the amount of extension memory you will need for your Peer Cop database For Add Up to a maximum of Overhead 9 words Global output 5 words Global input number of words 1088 words number of devices x 1 2 x number of device subentries Specific output 2 words for every device entry in Peer Cop 128 words Specific input 2 words for every device entry in Peer Cop 128 words Procedure From the Configuration Overview screen follow the steps below to establish configuration extension memory Step Action 1 From the Cfg Ext menu select Cfg Extension Size Result The cursor will appear in the Cfg Extension Used Size entry Type the desired size Push lt Enter gt 222 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Mod
126. ceeeceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeneeeeas 226 SEMING ANE TIME SEPTETO 228 Reading the Time of Day Clock 0 ceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeseaeeeneeeeaeeeeeeen 231 Section 8 3 Modifying Communication Port Parameters ccscccesscceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 232 OVEINVICW ein eine ee airs edited ie eee ence ees 232 Accessing the Port Editor Screen eeeecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeaeereeeee 233 Parameters Which Should Not Be Changed ccceesceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeens 234 Changing the Mode and Data Bits 00 0 ec ce eeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeteeeeseeeeeeeeaas 235 Ghanging Parity 2s8 neue ei aes eel ee to se 237 Changing the Baud Rate eeecceeceeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeeeeseaeeeneeeaas 238 Changing the Modbus Address ceccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeteaeeeeesneeeseeeteaeeeaes 239 Changing the Delays s2 4ss ne 28 tise aa aaaea tele petted R R aa Eo Ekaia 240 Changing the Protocol on Modbus Port 2 sssssssssssessesesinererrerrsernerrerreerrernene 241 Section 8 4 I O Mapping the Local I O Points eeceeeceeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteaeeeaeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeaas 242 Accessing and Editing the O Map ceceeseeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeete 242 Chapter9 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Modsoft 5 247 Supporting an I O Map for an I OBus Network sssesssssesseeseesesreserssresessrsee 248 Accessing an I O Map Screen for an I OBus Network
127. ces receive global data each device can index to specific locations in the incoming data and extract specific lengths of data from those points Data transactions therefore happen quickly as part of the token rotation and can be directly mapped between data references in the sending and receiving devices 870 USE 101 10 V 2 201 Using the Modbus Plus Ports 202 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Modsoft At a Glance Purpose This part describes how to configure an M1 CPU how to I O map an I OBus network how to configure a Modbus Plus network with Peer Cop and how to save to Flash using Modsoft 2 6 In This Part This part contains the following chapters For Information On See Chapter See Page Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft 8 205 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Modsoft 9 247 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Modsoft with Peer Cop 10 257 Saving to Flash in Modsoft 11 303 870 USE 101 10 V 2 203 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft 8 At a Glance Introduction This chapter explains how to configure a CPU using Modsoft 2 6 The procedures and examples described here can be applied with Modsoft Lite 2 6 as well tr Note Modsoft 2 6 does not support the 171 CCC 960 20 171 CCC 960 30 the 171 CCC 980 20 or 171 CCC 980 30 Processor Adapters These Processor Adapters must be configured with Concept In This Chapter The chapter contains the following topics
128. color code The cutout area above the I O model number allows the model number of the adapter to show through cr Note An Option Adapter may also be used in the assembled module You will find its model number printed in the upper left corner of Option Adapter housing Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 107 Assembling Momentum Components Guidelines for Labeling the CPU Continued Example of a A fill in label is illustrated below Fill In Label Addr Plant Station MODICON TSX Momentum mm e 170 ADM 350 10 OT 125 ees Ga 24 VDC IN 16 PT i 24 VDC OUT 16 PT AEAEE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15116 p s No Description Fields for plant name station name and network address Cutout the model number of the adapter shows through Model Number of the I O base Color code of the I O base Short description of the I O base Field for the symbol name of inputs NIOJ oO AJOJN Field for the symbol name of outputs 108 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Communication Ports At a Glance Purpose This part describes the communication ports available with TSX Momentum Processor Adapters and Option Adapters In This Part This part contains the following chapters For Information On See Chapter On Page Using the Modbus Ports 4 111 Using the Ethernet Port
129. connected the CPU automatically logs out the port This auto logout feature is designed to prevent a lock up situation that could prevent other host stations from logging in on other ports 870 USE 101 10 V 2 115 Using the Modbus Ports Cable Accessories for Modbus Port 1 Overview Cables D Shell Adapters This section describes the cable and D shell adapters needed to connect Modbus Port 1 to a programming station It also provides pinouts for the adapters The cable connecting a programming station to the CPU via Modbus Port 1 can be up to 9 5m long Three premade cable assemblies are available from Schneider Electric Length Part Number 1m 3 ft 110 XCA 282 01 3 m 10 ft 110 XCA 282 02 6 m 20 ft 110 XCA 282 03 All three assemblies are standard eight position foil shielded flat telephone cables with male RJ45 connectors on each end One RJ45 connector plugs into Modbus Port 1 on the CPU and the other plugs into a female D shell adapter that fits onto the programming station Two D shell adapters are available from Schneider Automation for CPU to computer connections A110 XCA 203 00 9 pin adapter for 9 pin serial ports A110 XCA 204 00 25 pin adapter for 25 pin serial ports These adapters have an RJ45 jack on one end that allows them to clip directly onto a cable assembly 116 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Pinouts for Modbus Port
130. d Accessing the Screen Step Action Continued 3 Click the check box next to Peer Cop then click OK Result Peer Cop status changes from Disabled to Enabled in the PLC Configuration screen F IPLC Configuration Config Extensions Data Protection Disabled Peer Cop Enabled Hot Standby Not Applicable Ethernet Not Applicable 4 Select Peer Cop from the Configure menu Result The Peer Cop dialog box appears Expansion Size i Goreme J Health timeout msec 500 aj F ol r Last value Global Specific Clear on timeout o input Input C Hold on timeout Output Output cme w 372 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Adjusting the Amount of Extension Memory Introduction Extension Memory Size Estimating How Much Memory to Reserve Changing the Amount of Memory The default amount of memory allotted for Configuration Extension is 100 words This amount may be adjusted within the Peer Cop dialog box The minimum Peer Cop memory requirement is 20 words the maximum is 4041 words Follow these guidelines for estimating the amount of extension memory you will need for your Peer Cop database For Add Up to a maximum of Overhead 9 words Global output 5 words 55 Global input number of words 1088 words number of devices x 1 2 x number of device subentries Speci
131. d write or read write commands up to 64 cyclic configured data slave paths Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 145 Using the Ethernet Port Security Overview Types of Firewalls Network Level Firewalls Application Level Firewalls To restrict access to your Ethernet controller and I O network you may want to consider a firewall A firewall is a gateway that controls access to your network There are two types of firewalls Network level firewalls Application level firewalls Network level firewalls are frequently installed between the Internet and a single point of entry to an internal protected network An application level firewall acts on behalf of an application It intercepts all traffic destined for that application and decides whether to forward that traffic to the application Application level firewalls reside on individual host computers 870 USE 101 10 V 2 146 Using the Ethernet Port Cabling Schemes Introduction In a standard Ethernet cabling scheme each device connects via a cable to a port on a central Ethernet hub Length The maximum length of cable between devices depends on the type of hub used as shown in the following table Type of Hub Max Cable from Max Hubs Between Max Cable Between Most Device to Hub Any Two Nodes Distant Nodes on Network Traditional 100 m 4 500 m Non switching
132. d Memory K I 0 Map Reserved Words Specials Ranges Battery Coil xxxx 666061 001536 Timer Register 1xxxx 166061 100512 Time of Day Clock 3xxxx 366061 300048 Cfg Extension Used Size ox 400061 461872 4xxxx lt gt SFC Dupl Coils Start xxxx lt gt SFC egments determines the order and kind of segment processing taking place Defaults for a This sample Configuration Overview screen shows the default configuration 12 0K Adapter parameters tilit OverView I OMap Segmnts Loadable Cfg Ext Quit F1 E2 F3 F4 RPS _F6 _ _ F Lev 8 F8 OFF F CONFIGURATION OVERU IEW Size of Full Logic Area 11532 PLC No of I 0 Map Words 66632 PLC Type MOMNTUM Model Mi Ivo 1 0 Type MOMENTUM System Memory 12 K Number of Segments 1 Extended Memory K 1 0 Map Reserved Words Specials Ranges 3 Battery Coil xxxx 666061 661536 Timer Register 1xxxx 166061 166512 Time of Day Clock 3xxxx 366061 300048 Cfg Extension Used Size 4xxxx 400061 401872 4xxxx lt gt SFC None Dupl Coils Start xxxx lt gt SFC orts access the PLCs MODBUS and ASCII ports for data transmission Continued on next page 212 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Default Configuration Parameters Continued Defaults for an 18 0 Adapter This sample Configuration Overview screen shows the default configuration parameters i o s t m p Loadable Cfg Ext
133. dapters Memory and Performance Characteristics Continued Memory Size and The memory size and clock speed of each processor are described in the table Clock Speed below Processor 984LL Flash RAM Clock Speed 984LL IEC Program Program Memory Memory 171 CCS 700 00 64K bytes 256K bytes 20MHz 2 4k 171 CCS 700 10 64K bytes 256K bytes 32MHz 2 4k 171 CCS 760 00 256K bytes 256K bytes 20MHz 12k 160k 171 CCC 760 10 512K bytes 512K bytes 32MHz 18k 240k 171 CCS 780 00 64K bytes 256K bytes 20MHz 2 4k 171 CCC 780 10 512K bytes 512K bytes 32MHz 18k 240k 171 CCC 960 20 544K bytes 512K bytes 50 MHz 18k 171 CCC 960 30 544K bytes 1 megabyte 50 MHz 18k 200k 171 CCC 980 20 544K bytes 512K bytes 50 MHz 18k 171 CCC 980 30 544K bytes 1 megabyte 50 MHz 18k 200k In a default configuration The amount of user memory may be increased or decreased by adjusting other parameters 870 USE 101 10 V 2 25 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters Memory and Performance Characteristics Continued Input and Output References The number of registers for 3x and 4x references and discretes for 0x and 1x references supported by each processor are described in the table below Processor Adapter 984LL Executive IEC Executive 8192 1x references Registers Discretes Registers Discre
134. dbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop 398 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Saving to Flash with Concept 4 5 Saving to Flash Overview You save to Flash so that in the event of an unexpected loss of power the application logic and state RAM values will be preserved This section describes how to save the application logic and state RAM values to Flash using Concept 2 1 CF Note You can save to Flash if you are using the 984LL executive for all models except 171 CCC 960 30 and the 171 CCC 980 30 You can only save to Flash on the 171 CCC 960 30 and the 171 CCC 980 30 if you are using the Concept IEC executive Note The 171 CCC 960 30 and 171 CCC 980 30 require Concept 2 2 with service release 2 870 USE 101 10 V 2 399 Saving to Flash with Concept Saving to Flash Continued Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to save to Flash Step Action 1 From the Online menu on the main menu bar select Connect Result The Connect to PLC dialog box appears Protocol type r Protocol settings Modbus Mode A Modbus Plus PLC Node pay Device 9600 e 8 1 TCP IP O eeuen IEC Simulator 32 bi baa C ASCII com E bell nia Access Level List of nodes on Modbus Plus network C Monitor only z C Change Data C Change Program Host adapter Cancel Rescan lt Previous Next gt Help 2 Select the correct parameters to connect with your PLC Under Access Lev
135. des see list at the end of his section F2 t i ee i Se ic Se j ee 3 MOMENTUM MOME 176 BDO 356 00 IBS _ 332_IOBUS 170 BDO 946 50 IBS _ 333_IOBUS 170 BNO 671 00 IBS _ 461_IOBUS PAGE NO IBS_ 161_IOBUS IBS _ 462_IOBUS 1 IBS _ 162_IOBUS IBS _6463_IOBUS IBS_ 163_IOBUS IBS _ 431_IOBUS IBS _ 261_IOBUS IBS _ 432_IOBUS IBS _ 262_IOBUS IBS_ 433_IOBUS IOBUS IBS_ 5 1_IOBUS IBS_ 263_ pal IBS_ 231_IOBUS IBS_ 562_IOBUS IBS _ 232_IOBUS IBS _ 563_I OBUS IBS _ 233_IOBUS IBS _ 531_IOBUS IBS _ 361_IOBUS IBS _ 532_IOBUS IBS _ 362_IOBUS IBS_ 533_IOBUS IBS_ 363_IOBUS IBS _6633_IOBUS IBS_ 331_IOBUS IBS_1233_IOBUS je Fak peh ak fa fk pah pak pak pak ak ak ek ek poa Continued on next page 252 870 USE 101 10 V 2 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Modsoft Editing the l OBus I O Map Continued Action Move the cursor onto the desired model number and push lt Enters gt Result The module type and its description are displayed on the I O Map screen The cursor is positioned so that you can assign the appropriate state RAM reference s to the unit Example If you select a 170 ADI 350 00 32 point input base the screen will look ke this li FA _F 2 _F3 ____F 4 _ 5 _ 6 _ F Lev 8 F8 OFF F MOMENTUM Type IOBUS Drop 1 Available 233 Used I0 Points 4 of 2648 PAGE NODE Module Input Ref Output
136. dress Delay Protocol Bits Bits EVEN 1 2600 6 1 16 ms 8 EVEN 1 9688 4 1 16 ms RS232 This screen will always show two sets of port parameters even if your particular CPU configuration supports only Modbus Port 1 In that case ignore any parameter values shown for Port 2 870 USE 101 10 V 2 233 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Parameters Which Should Not Be Changed Overview Two parameters on the Port editor screen should not be changed These are the stop bit and head slot parameters Stop Bit Each port operates only with 1 stop bit While Modsoft will allow you to select 2 stop bits this setting is invalid Head Slot The Head Slot parameter is set to 0 and should be left at this value for the Momentum M1 CPUs 234 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Mode and Data Bits Introduction From the Port editor screen each port can be configured to operate in one of two possible modes RTU or ASCII lf the mode is RTU the number of data bits is always 8 If the mode is ASCII the number of data bits is always 7 CF Note The factory set default is 8 bit RTU Procedure To change the mode and data bit parameters perform the steps in the following table Step Action 1 Place the cursor on the current Mode entry for the Modbus port you want to enter Push lt Enter gt Result A popup window appears in the top left corner of the screen disp
137. e 870 USE 101 10 V 2 51 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 960 30 Continued Illustration The connectors and LED indicators are shown in the following illustration ail b SS La A THERNET A a TSX Momentum Automation Inc _ AN PROCESSOR ADAPTER MEG WRITE ASSIGN URES ACT ENET a 485 Do Not Us picate Address z ENET RS485 se Permanent t tir i LAN PV 01 E RL 00 A 160 SV PROTO SN 31993900845 Warranty Ref 03 2000 P amp PET unin L m Made s 4 Label Description 1 Ethernet port connector 2 OBus port connector 3 LED indicators 52 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 960 30 Continued LED Indicators Specifications This Processor Adapter has three LED indicators RUN LAN ACT IVE and LAN ST ATUS Their functions are described in the table below LED Indicator Status Pattern Start up Both Single flash Indicates good health RUN Green On continuously when the CPU has received power and is solving logic Flashes an error pattern if the CPU is in kernel mode See Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes on page 417 Off CPU is not powered up or is not solving logic LAN ACT Green May be on continuously or blinking Indicates activity on Ethernet port Off No activity on Ethernet port LAN ST Green On continuously during normal operat
138. e a black boot Description Part Number Illustration Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 Short Interconnect Cable 10 170 MCI 020 10 Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 3 ft Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 36 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 191 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Cable Accessories for Modbus Plus Networks Continued Cable Between Cable for connecting two Modbus Plus clusters or for fabricating drop cables to Clusters and from clusters is available from Schneider Automation in two lengths These cables have a black boot Description Part Number Illustration Modbus Plus 10 ft Drop Cable 170 MCI 021 20 Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 10 ft Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 021 80 Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 30 ft Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 80 Continued on next page 192 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Cable Accessories for Modbus Plus Networks Continued DB9 Connector This connector is used in cluster mode with a Modbus Plus Communication oT Adapter or with the 172 PNN 210 22 or 172 PNN 260 22 Modbus Plus Option Adapters CF Note Only one connector T may be used with each adapter making it impossible to use redundant cabling in cluster mode Description Part Number Illustration Modbus Plus Connector T 170 XTS 020 00 DB9 base D SCHNEIDER AUTOMATION IN
139. e passed from device to device CAUTION A N COMMUNICATION ERRORS MAY RESULT Do not install a Modbus Plus Option Adapter before you have set its Modbus Plus address for your application See your network administrator to get the Modbus Plus node address for this module Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Address The assignment of addresses does not have to map to the physical layout of the Sequence network e g device 17 is placed physically before device 3 This is important to understand because the network s token rotation is defined by device addresses e g device 2 will pass the token to device 3 device 3 to device 4 etc Illegal Addresses _ If you set the node address to 00 or to a value greater than 64 The COM LED will go ON steadily to indicate an illegal address assignment The Run LED will flash 4 times The Processor Adapter will not run until you set a valid unused address on the Option Adapter and cycle power Continued on next page 198 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Modbus Plus Addresses Continued Setting Modbus Two rotary switches on the Momentum Option Adapter are used to set the network Plus Addresses address The top switch X10 sets the upper digit tens of the address The lower switch X1 sets the lower digit ones of the address Node Address X10 Setting X1 Setting 1
140. ea by the number of words allocated for Peer Cop 320 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Understanding the Number of Segments Only the First The number of segments specified in the Configuration Overview screen Segment is determines the number of I O Map drops that you will be able to set up for your Solved CPU When you are using Concept 2 2 the default number of segments is 1 in most CPUs This number is adequate for all processor adapters and does not need to be changed However you should only use the second segment for I OBus I O mapping or other subroutines 870 USE 101 10 V 2 321 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Changing the Size of the I O Map Introduction Processors for l OBus Networks The default size of the I O Map is 144 words You may want to adjust this number to provide more support for an I OBus network or to increase the size of the full logic area With l OBus an I O Map table is used to define the number location and type of I O devices on the network bus Default 144 words Minimum 4 words Maximum 6143 words or not to exceed the PLC s memory size All Other Other Processor Adapters only use the I O Map for local I O The default of 144 Processors words is more than sufficient for any Momentum I O base Depending on the requirements of your I O base you may be able to reduce the number of wo
141. ector in a Modbus connector Illustration The connector and LED indicators are shown in the following illustration on N raaa bda waa SA aRoaswese NT a pL naanin yA gy HUN ATLA RR res NUE 5 Schneider mas 70 0 TSX Momentum A Automation Inc e m mesman O Ece MET Mace 0 UEA f r vo m Label Description 1 Modbus Port 1 connector 2 LED indicators Continued on next page 32 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCS 700 10 Continued LED Indicators This Processor Adapter has two LED indicators RUN and COM ACT Their functions are described in the table below LED Status Function Start up Both Single flash Indicates good health RUN Green On continuously when the CPU has received power and is solving logic Flashes an error pattern if the CPU is in kernel mode See Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes on page 417 Off CPU is not powered up or is not solving logic COM ACT Green May be on continuously or blinking Indicates activity on Modbus port 1 Off No activity on Modbus port 1 Specifications The following table contains specifications for the 171 CCS 700 10 Momentum M1 Processor Adapter Memory Internal Memory 64K bytes User Memory 2 4K words Flash RAM 256K bytes Clock Speed 32 MHz Input and Output References Registers 2048 Discretes 2048 any combination of
142. ed Modbus Plus The two rotary switches on the Option Adapter are used to set a Modbus Plus node Address address for the CPU module The switches are shown in the following illustration Switches Their usage is described in detail in Modbus Plus Addresses on page 198 The switches in this illustration are set to address 14 X10 x1 76 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Option Adapters Specifications Specifications This section provides the specifications for the 172 PNN 210 22 Momentum Serial Option Adapter Mechanical Weight 85 05 g 3 02 Dimensions HxDxW 58 3 on battery side x 60 6 x 143 1mm 2 27 x 2 36 x 5 57 in Material Enclosures bezels Lexan Time of Day Clock Accuracy 13 s day Batteries Type AAA alkaline two required Two included with Option Adapter in separate package Service life lt 30 days from the time a battery low indication is received to actual battery failure 40degrees C maximum ambient temperature with the system continuously powered down Shelf life In excess of 5 yr room temperature Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interactions Enclosures and bezels are made of Lexan a polycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC
143. ees 101 Section 3 3 Installing Batteries in an Option Adapter c cecceseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeenneetaas 105 Installation Guidelines 0 0 eee ceeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeseaceeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeessaeeeesnseeesaees 105 Section 3 4 Labeling the GPU EE et he ee ea ents Sete 107 Guidelines for Labeling the CPU ooo eeeececeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeseaeeseeeteaeesneeeneeeea 107 Part Il Communication Ports ssssssssssecsessensssssseeeeseensseeseeeseneees 109 Chapter 4 Using the Modbus Ports cccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneees 111 Section 4 1 Modbus Port T snses is itl s e a o a diaaa ataia a 112 OVEN WOW estas Aid EAT A ET AE Le tle oid Des LES oom ths 112 Modbus Port see Sead di At et ee E 113 Cable Accessories for Modbus Port 1 0 ceeseeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeesseeeseeeeeaeeeaes 116 viii 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Contents Section 4 2 Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 3 Section 5 4 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Pinouts for Modbus Port Trisno E Sh ead 117 Modbus POrt vs hi c8 sein eho ee ate te ed eee eat ee ai 119 OVOWIOW v 00sseleviese nse nese Miia eect ia lint ieee ek i EEEE E A 119 Modbus POr 2 ccc tesserae eae roia paree ardia aae i 120 Four Wire Cabling Schemes for Modbus R8485 Networks ecceee 123 Two Wire Cabling Schemes for Modbus RS485 Networks cesee 126 Cable for Modbus RS485 Networks eeceecceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneessaeeeeeesate
144. eets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of protection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric strength RS232 and OBus are non isolated from logic common Ground continuity 30 A test on the exposed metal connector Agency Approvals e UL508 CSA CUL CE e FM classi div2 40 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCS 780 00 Overview This section describes the 171 CCS 780 00 Processor Adapter including key features an illustration and specifications Key Features The key features of this Processor Adapter are Modbus Port 1 Modbus Port 2 64K bytes of internal memory 20 MHz clock speed cr Note The Modbus port connector looks like a Ethernet port connector Do not attempt to use an Modbus adapter as an Ethernet unit Do not attempt to place an Ethernet connector in a Modbus connector Illustration The connectors and LED indicators are shown in the following illustration LRN Ts ee YQYPAVBWBAIVSwe pBRREBESSSEEE 4 pee ea IDL DA CoN ocs 700 0 3 Schneider Lhe te TSX Momentum Automation Inc
145. eferences ccceeeee 318 Changing the Size of the Full Logic Area eeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeteeeenneeeaes 320 Understanding the Number of Segments c cecceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneete 321 Changing the Size of the I O Map ou eeeeeecceceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeneeeeeeete 322 Establishing Configuration Extension Memory for Peer Cop n se 324 Section 12 2 Configuring Option Adapter Features ceceeeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneesneeeeeeeeea 327 870 USE 101 10 V 2 xi Contents OVENIEW feces al ee ee dt Gee 327 Reserving and Monitoring a Battery Coil eeeceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeeens 328 Setting up the Time of Day Clock eeeeeeceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeeseaeeenaeteas 331 Setting he TMe 24 sez cake ses a ea tk Saena AEREA raa acdsazetsaaesusens tale 334 Reading the Time of Day Clock eeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeen 335 Section 12 3 Modifying Modbus Port Parameters eesceeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeaeeeseneeeeenaeeeee 336 OVENIEW Seen iii ene eee ele ieee oe si ie 336 Accessing the Modbus Port Settings Dialog BOX eccesceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaes 337 Changing the Baud Rate ececceeceeeeteneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeesaeeeneeseaeesseeteas 338 Changing Mode and Data Bits 2 0 eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeteas 339 Stop Bit Should Not Be Changed cceceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeesaeeeneeeeaeeeseeeeas 3
146. efore a timeout once Modbus Plus communications have been restored One of two settings may be used CLEAR or HOLD CLEAR sets all the previously received values to 0 and HOLD retains the previous values For our example we will change the setting to HOLD Continued on next page 268 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Confirming the Peer Cop Summary Information Continued Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to change the Peer Cop summary information Step Action 1 Push lt Tab gt to move the cursor to the menu bar at the top of the Peer Cop screen 2 Move the cursor onto the Timeout command Push lt Enter gt Result The cursor moves into the Timeout field in the Peer Cop summary information region and the default value 500 is cleared tilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode Quit a a a a rs ee OF PEER COP Timeout ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 1 OF 1366 WORDS Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT 3 Type the number 240 then push lt Enter gt Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 269 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Confirming the Peer Cop Summary Information Continued Procedure Continued S
147. el select the radio button to Change Configuration 3 Click OK Result The Connect to PLC dialog box disappears and Concept connects to your PLC Continued on next page 400 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Saving to Flash with Concept Saving to Flash Continued Procedure Continued Step Action 4 From the Online menu on the main menu bar select Online control panel Result The Online Control Panel appears Online Control Panel x Controller Executive ID is 898 Version 0200 i r Time of Day clock Start controller oes jgured Clear controller r Constant sweep settings Invoke constant sweep register for parar ponimo target scan time ms Invoke single sweep free running scan time ms Set clock Single sweep settings single sweep time base ms 0 Invoke optimized solve sweep trigger count 1 Elash program Help 5 Click the Flash program button Result The Save to Flash dialog box appears Save To Flash x Flash Type p Controller State Save To Flash Internal C Start After Power Up PCMCIA Stop After Power Up Clear Flash IV Save State Ram Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 401 Saving to Flash with Concept Saving to Flash Continued Procedure Continued Step Action Select the appropriate parameters in the dialog box and click the Save to Flash button Result A d
148. elNode F14 F 2 F3 ___F 4 F5 _F6 F L PEER COP Timeout 246 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error HOLD USED 1 OF 1366 WORDS Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT 300016 E BIN SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT a Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 273 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Specifying References for Input Data Continued Action Type the value 1 in the LEN column of the SPECIFIC INPUT field indicating that the device at address 2 will transmit 1 word of data or 16 bits Then push lt Enter gt Result The cursor is now on BIN binary the TYPE column Utilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode 1 _ _ F2 3 F 4 5 _Ft F Ley 8 F8 OFF F PEER COP 246 ms Total Links HOLD USED 13 Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT 300016 300016 1 i SPECIFIC OUTPUT a GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES GLOBAL OUTPUT a Link Id 1 OF 1366 WORDS Timeout On Error ON LINK Procedure Continued Step 3 4 Push lt Enter gt Result A popup menu appears You can choose between leaving the data type a
149. elNode Fi 3 5 6 L Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id i On Error CLEAR USED 13 OF 2666 WORDS Access to Node 1 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT gt SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400024 400039 16 BIN GLOBAL INPUT 400001 BIN GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Continued on next page 294 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining the References for the Next Node Continued Defining Global Inputs Continued Step Action Type the value 7 in the LEN column of the GLOBAL INPUT field to indicate that seven words will be accepted Then push lt Enter gt Result The remaining reference field is filled automatically and the cursor moves to the TYPE column Utilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode y Quit IR Fs F6 F L PEER COP Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 18 OF 2666 WORDS Access to Node 1 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400024 400039 16 BIN GLOBAL INPUT 400001 400007 BI N GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT With the TYPE column of the SPECIFIC OUTPUT filed set to BIN push lt Enter gt twice Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 2
150. elds for Input and Output References Click the lt OK gt button Local I O Only This screen is always used to I O Map the local I O base only No other I O base units can be I O Mapped on this first screen I O Bus A If you are I O Mapping a Processor Adapter which supports I OBus communication Special Case stations you will need to go to a separate I O Map screen for Drop 2 That process is described in O Mapping an l OBus Network with Concept on page 361 870 USE 101 10 V 2 359 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept 360 870 USE 101 10 V 2 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Concept 1 3 At a Glance Purpose This chapter describes how to I O Map an I OBus network using Concept 2 2 Topics This chapter contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Supporting an I O Map for an I OBus Network 362 Accessing an I O Map Screen for an I OBus Network 363 Editing the I OBus I O Map 365 870 USE 101 10 V 2 361 I O Mapping an l OBus Network with Concept Supporting an I O Map for an I OBus Network Introduction Three Processor Adapters have an I OBus communication port that enables them to control and communicate with other network slave I O 171 CCS 760 00 171 CCC 760 10 171 CCC 960 20 171 CCC 960 30 If you are using I OBus to control network I O you need to write an I O Map in your configuration This section describes the config
151. elow to remove the assembled Option Adapter and Removing the M1 Processor Adapter from the I O base Adapter Assembly from Step Action the I O Base 1 Be sure that the power is off by removing the terminal connectors from the I O base 2 Remove the assembled unit from its wall or DIN rail mounting surface CAUTION AN EXPOSED CIRCUITRY IN BATTERY COMPARTMENT Use care when you insert a screwdriver in the battery compartment so that you do not scratch any exposed elements Failure to observe this precaution can result in equipment damage 3 Open the battery door and use a flat head screwdriver to release snaps 1 and 2 as shown in the illustration below Continued on next page 102 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Assembling Momentum Components Disassembling a Module with an Option Adapter Continued Procedure Removing the Adapter Assembly from the I O Base Continued Step Action 4 Once snaps 1 and 2 have been disengaged use the screwdriver to release snaps 3 and 4 on the front of the assembly 5 Gently lift the stirrup on the back of the Option Adapter with your fingers until it disengages from the bottom of the I O base Then lift the Option Adapter and M1 assembly from the I O base Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 103 Assembling Momentum Components Disassembling a Module with an Option Adapter Continued Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to remove the Op
152. eneeteeaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeseeeeenaeeeennneeeenaes 198 POCh GOP MARPET E TETE EEA E S T 200 Part Ill MOOS OPE sisesecsntrasierasnesvud ecssgaeasenscacmnessinannauaedadiax esnandanasscunaneadaeats 203 Chapter8 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft cc seeeeeeeeees 205 Section 8 1 Configuring the Processor Adapter cccccesceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeesseeeseeeteaeeenes 206 OVENIEW Jeni aire eel He il ee tit see a 206 Selecting an M1 Processor Adapter ceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeseresieeeeaeene 207 Specifying an M1 Processor Type c ccecceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeaas 210 Default Configuration Parameters cccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeteaeseeeeseaeeeeeeeeeee 212 Changing the Range of Discrete and Register References 00ce 215 Changing the Size of Your Application Logic Space ou cceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 217 Changing the Number of Segment c eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeetieeeeeete 218 Changing the Size of the I O Map eeeecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeessaeeseeeeeaeeeaes 220 Establishing Configuration Extension Memory cecccesceseteeeereeteeeeeeeeneetens 222 Section 8 2 Configuring Option Adapter Features 0 cceecceeeceeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeeneeeneeee 223 OVEINVIEW erie ities Sets hated nd ee es ed 223 Reserving and Monitoring a Battery Coil e ee ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeneeeeeeen 224 Setting up the Time of Day Clock cee
153. ents 1 Timer Register Time of Day Config Extensions Data Protection Disabled Peer Cop Disabled Hot Standby Not Applicable Ethernet Not Applicable Profibus DP Not Applicable Continued on next page 316 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Default Configuration Parameters Continued Defaults for an This sample PLC Configuration screen shows the default configuration parameters 18 4K Machine PLC Configuration Oix PLC Type 171 CCC 960 20 984 Available Logic Area 17649 Exec Id 898 Extended Memory Memory Size 18 43K Ranges Loadables Coils 000001 001536 Number installed 0 Discrete Inputs 100001 100512 Input Registers 300001 300048 Holding Registers 400001 401872 Default Values Specials Segment Scheduler Battery Coil Segments 1 Timer Register Time of Day Config Extensions Data P rotection Disabled Peer Cop Disabled Hot Standby Not Applicable Ethernet Not Applicable Profibus DP Not Applicable Here are the default parameters Parameter 2 4K Machine 12 2K Machine 18 4K Machine Coils in state RAM 1536 0x 1536 0x 1536 0x Discrete inputs in state RAM 512 1x 512 1x 512 1x Input registers in state RAM 48 3x 48 3x 48 3x Output registers in state RAM 1872 4x 1872 4x 1872 4x Full logic area in bytes 1678 11532 17649 Words of
154. entum Processor Adapter for configuration 870 USE 101 10 V 2 209 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Specifying an M1 Processor Type Introduction Which Type Should I Choose If You Choose the Wrong Type Once you have selected an M1 Processor Adapter in Modsoft 2 6 you must choose between three types of M1 processors A 2 4K machine A12 0K machine An18 0K machine These numbers refer to the amount of user memory in the CPU Use the table below to determine which processor type to choose Processor Adapter Type 171 CCS 700 00 2 4 171 CCS 700 10 2 4 171 CCS 760 00 12 0 171 CCC 760 10 18 0 171 CCS 780 00 2 4 171 CCC 780 10 18 0 If you choose the wrong machine type for the CPU you are configuring you can run into the following kinds of problems f you specify too much memory Modsoft allows you to create a configuration and logic program that could be too big for the CPU you are using When you try to transfer your program to the CPU your transfer will fail If you specify too little memory Modsoft restricts the size of your configuration and logic program and may not allow you to I O Map an I OBus network as described in I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Modsoft on page 247 Continued on next page 210 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Specifying an M1 Processor Type Continued Procedure
155. er Cop screen for node 2 should look like this Screen Node 2 Timeout 246 On Error HOLD Access to Node MODE SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT ms Total Links Link Id 1 USED 13 OF 1366 WORDS 2 OnError De 1Node 6 7 REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX PUT 300016 300016 BIN N TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Continued on next page 278 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Completing the I O Device Configuration in Peer Cop Continued Completed The completed Peer Cop screen for node 3 should look like this Screen Node 3 GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode F3 F4 F5 F6 F L PEER COP Timeout 246 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error HOLD USED 1 OF 1366 WORDS Access to Node 3 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400016 400016 1 BIN GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Ea Completed The completed Peer Cop screen for node 4 should look like this Screen Node 4 GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode Le OSSEE V OST a E i ESEN a SEEE i f PEER COP Timeout 240 ms Total Links Link Id i On Error HOLD USED 19 OF 1366 WORDS Access to Node 4 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX
156. erating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interactions Enclosures and bezels are made of Lexan a polycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA RFI Susceptibility immunity Meets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of protection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric strength RS232 and I OBus are non isolated from logic common Ground continuity 30 A test on the exposed metal connector Agency Approvals e UL508 CSA CUL CE e FMclass1 div2 870 USE 101 10 V 2 37 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 760 10 Overview Key Features CF Illustration This section describes the 171 CCC 760 10 Processor Adapter including key features an illustration and specifications The key features of this Processor Adapter are Modbus Port 1
157. ernet Processor does not contain an IP address This is also true if you have not programmed the unit with an Ethernet configuration extension In this condition when the module starts up it will attempt to obtain an IP address from the network s BOOTP server You can use Concept to assign an IP address default gateway and sub network mask See Setting Ethernet Address Parameters on page 348 You can also assign IP address parameters using the BOOTP Lite software utility See Using BOOTP Lite to Assign Address Parameters on page 152 A CAUTION DUPLICATE ADDRESS HAZARD Be sure that your Processor Adapter will receive a unique IP address Having two or more devices with the same IP address can cause unpredictable operation of your network Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Using a BOOTP Server How an unconfigured as shipped module obtains an IP address Specifying Address Parameters A BOOTP server is a program that manages the IP addresses assigned to devices on the network Your system administrator can confirm whether a BOOTP server exists on your network and can help you use the server to maintain the adapter s IP address On startup an unconfigured processor will attempt to obtain an IP address by issuing BOOTP requests When a response from a BOOTP server is obtained that IP address will be used If a response is not heard then the Bootp requ
158. errupts are disabled for 10 seconds Words 14 15 Not used Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 154 Using the Ethernet Port Description Continued Words 16 17 Receiver Errors Words 18 19 Framing Errors Overflow Errors Words 20 21 CRC Errors High Word Not used always 0 Low Word Peak Collision Detector This field contains the number of consecutive collisions that occurred before the frame was successfully transmitted out onto the Ethernet Most transmitted frames have zero collisions Some have one collision on the first transmit attempt and succeed on the second attempt Some have more than one collision followed by success The largest number of consecutive collisions since clear statistics command is stored and displayed in this field Counts the number of received frames addressed to this node that are greater than 320 bytes in length Any such large frame has no relevance to the M1 Ethernet adapter and therefore is skipped This error should not occur Increments whenever a received frame cannot be copied into the frame buffer because the frame buffer is full This situation should never occur under legal Ethernet traffic Increments when the received packet is received under any of the following error conditions CRC error Extra data error Runt error This counter can be made to increment by continuously disconnecting and reconnecting the M1 Ethernet cable dur
159. es for l OBus Networks 175 Cable Accessories 177 Pinouts 179 870 USE 101 10 V 2 171 Using the I OBus Port I O Bus Port Introduction The I OBus port allows a Momentum CPU to assume bus master capabilities over as many as 255 slave devices over an Interbus cable CF Note Processors that support IEC are limited to a maximum number of 1408 used I O points regardless of the number of modules Connector Type The I OBus port has a female 9 pin D shell connector Illustration The following illustration shows the position of the I OBus port on a Processor Adapter Label Description 1 OBus port 172 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the I OBus Port How I OBus Works Introduction How Signals Are Passed How Data is Transferred Transmission Speed Amount of data This section describes how signals are passed and how data is transferred in an OBus network OBus operates as a logical ring with signals being passed by the master over a remote bus cable to each slave device in series The slaves return signals to the master over the same cable The I OBus functions as a logical shift register The application s entire data stream originating at the master is transferred serially from slave to slave down the remote bus Each slave regenerates the entire stream before passing it on As a slave handles the stream data it extracts the portion that is
160. ests will continue for as long as the unit remains powered or until a response is heard Consult your system administrator to obtain a valid IP address and appropriate gateway and subnet mask if required Then follow the instructions in Setting Ethernet Address Parameters on page 348 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 149 Using the Ethernet Port Assigning Ethernet Address Parameters Continued When the Processor Adapter is Ethernet 1 0 Scanner Powered up with a Configuration Ethernet Configuration for Use Bootp Server C Disable Ethernet If the processor adapter is powered up without battery backup and its IP address was previously saved to flash the adapter will issue three Bootp requests five seconds apart ifa Bootp response is received from the server the IP address will be assigned but will not be saved to flash Use the programming software to save the IP address to flash If a power cycle occurs on the processor adapter the IP address that is currently saved in flash will be used f a Bootp response is not received from the server the processor adapter will use the IP address that is stored in flash Three ARP broadcasts are made five seconds apart to check for duplicate IP addresses Then three gratuitous ARP broadcasts are made two seconds apart with the station s MAC address and IP address Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 150 Usi
161. et port is a standard twisted pair Ethernet 10BASE T port which can communicate with programming panels other M1 Processor Adapters with Ethernet ports and with other Ethernet products This port has an RJ45 connector with an industry standard pinout Modbus Port 1 is a general purpose asynchronous serial port with dedicated RS232 slave functionality This port has an RJ45 connector Continued on next page 22 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters Overview of Ports Continued Modbus Port 2 Modbus Port 2 is a general purpose asynchronous serial port with dedicated RS485 slave functionality This port has a 9 pin D connector OBus Port The I OBus port is used to control and communicate with other network non local I O modules under the control of the CPU This port has a 9 pin D connector 870 USE 101 10 V 2 23 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters Memory and Performance Characteristics Introduction Internal Memory Flash RAM Processor Adapters are equipped with internal memory and Flash RAM This section explains those two types of memory and describes the memory size and performance characteristics of each Processor Adapter Internal memory includes user memory and state RAM User memory contains the control logic program and such system overhead as the Processor Adapter configuration I O mapping checksum and system diagnostics State RAM i
162. f segments Utilit OverView I OMap Ports Segmnts Loadable Cfg Ext Qu A On o 2 ____F3 ___F 4 YF5 _F6 F Lev 8 F8 OFF FY CONFIGURATION OVERU IEW Size of Full Logic Area 11532 PLC No of I 0 Map Words 66632 PLC Type MOMNTUM Model Mi 170 System Memory 12 K Extended Memory K 1 0 Type Number of Segments I O Map Reserved Words MOMENTUM t Specials Battery Coil Timer Register Time of Day Clock Cfg Extension Used Size Ranges Oxxxx 600061 601536 1xxxx 106061 100512 3xxxx 300061 300048 4xxxx 400061 401872 4xxxx lt gt SFC None Dupl Coils Start xxxx lt gt SFC Type the new number of segments Push lt Enter gt 870 USE 101 10 V 2 219 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Size of the I O Map Introduction Processors For The default size of the I O Map and your options vary depending on whether or not your Processor Adapter supports an I OBus network With l OBus an I O Map table is used to define the number location and type of I O Bus I O devices on the network bus Networks Default 512 words Minimum 17 words All Other Other Processor Adapters only use the I O Map for local I O The default of 32 Processors words is sufficient for any Momentum I O base Depending on the requirements of your I O base you may be able to reduce the number of words
163. fic output 2 words for every device entry in Peer Cop 128 words Specific input 2 words for every device entry in Peer Cop 128 words Type the desired size in the Expansion Size text box or use your mouse to adjust the button on the horizontal slider 870 USE 101 10 V 2 373 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Other Default Settings in the Peer Cop Dialog Box Overview This section describes the default settings for Health Timeout and Last Value Diagram The first time you access the Peer Cop dialog box the following screen appears Expansion Size MZ Goren Health timeout msec jo qyp Last value r Global Specific Clear on timeout Input Input C Hold on timeout Output Output a Heip Health Timeout The default Timeout is 500 ms Timeout is the maximum interval that Modbus Plus on a Peer Copped device will remain healthy without communication activity If this interval is exceeded the device will clear its network health bit and will no longer try to communicate via Modbus Plus The timeout interval must be in the range 20 2000 ms and it must be specified as an increment of 20 ms Continued on next page 374 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Other Default Settings in the Peer Cop Dialog Box Continued Last Value The default Las
164. for the 171 CCC 760 10 Momentum M1 Processor Adapter Memory Internal Memory 512K bytes User Memory 18K words 984LL Exec 240K words IEC Exec Flash RAM 512K bytes Clock Speed 32 MHz 984LL Input and Output References Registers 26048 Discretes 8192 Ox references 8192 1x references IEC Input and Output References Registers 26048 Discretes 8192 Ox references 8192 1x references Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 39 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 760 10 Continued Specifications Continued I O Servicing Local I O Services all the points on any host Momentum I O base Watchdog timeout 262 ms Logic solve time 0 16 ms k ladder logic instructions Mechanical Weight 42 5 g 1 5 oz Dimensions HxDxW 25 9x61 02x125mm 1 01 x 2 37 x 4 86 in Material Enclosures bezels Lexan Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interactions Enclosures and bezels are made of Lexan a polycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA RFI Susceptibility immunity M
165. ft Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 021 80 Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 30 ft Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 80 Drop cables connecting a cluster to the trunk cable must be at least 10 ft 3 m long A 10 ft drop cable is available A 30 ft drop cable may be fabricated by removing one RJ45 connector from a 30 ft interconnect cable Connect the open end of the cable to a Modbus Plus tap using the wiring illustrations on page 194 Description Part Number Modbus Plus 10 ft Drop Cable 170 MCI 021 20 Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 30 ft Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 80 Continued on next page 188 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Cluster Mode Cabling Schemes Continued Cluster Scheme In this example two clusters of Momentum I O modules are connected in 1 sequence The trunk cable continues from the clusters in both directions D Label Description Part Number 1 Modbus Plus Tap 990 NAD 230 00 2 Modbus Plus 10 ft Drop Cable 170 MCI 021 20 3 Modbus Plus Connector T DB9 base 170 XTS 020 00 4 Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 Short Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020
166. ges eeeeeeeeeteeteeeereees 164 Momentum M1E Web Pages scccesseceeeneeeeeneeeseneeeeseaeesenaeeeseneeeeeneeereaeees 165 Momentum M1E Indicators 0 ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeesecaeeeseesenneeeeeees 170 Using the VOBUS POM cscuccsse cs cceditiss oceecetccti sti teed 171 VO BUS Ports fesse seven E E niveng cue evoeys degoeress A nates ees 172 How OBus Works iniit enn eie eenieders ideaa ei vhs teaiivbvstves 173 Network Status Indication in the M1 Ethernet Module ssssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeen 174 Guidelines for OBus Networks cccccceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeessaeeeesneeessneeesaes 175 Gable ACCESSOo iES iseinean aeneo eae aree aT i dapi dierri diaa 177 LAOI E E A E E A E 179 Using the Modbus Plus Ports cccccceeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 181 Modbus Plus Features for MOMENTUM sssesssesssieerrresrirssrrrsernerrrnerrnnsrrenerees 182 Two Types of Modbus Plus Networks cc eeeesceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeteneeeeeaa 183 Standard Cabling SCHEMES cccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeseesieeeeanens 185 Cluster Mode Cabling SCHEMES ceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeseeeeseeeseeeeeaeeeneeeeaners 187 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Contents Cable Accessories for Modbus Plus Networks c ceeceseeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeaes 191 Pinouts and Wiring Illustrations for Modbus Plus Networks eceeeeeee 194 Modbus Plus Addresses eesceeeseeeeeneeeee
167. gister values for the time of day clock Step Action 1 Set the correct date and time in registers 4x 1 through 4x 7 Example To set the clock for Thursday April 9 1998 at 4 17 00 set the following values in the registers 4x 15 4x 2 4 4x 3 9 4x 4 98 4x 5 4 4x 6 17 4x 7 00 2 Load the value 8000H in register 4x to write the data to the clock 230 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Reading the Time of Day Clock Overview This section tells how to read the time of day clock and uses an example to describe how to interpret the time of day clock registers Reading the Set the value 4000H in register 4x to read data from the clock Clock Example If you reserved registers 400100 400107 as your TOD clock registers set the time bits and then read the clock at 9 25 30 on Thursday July 16 1998 the registers would display the following values Register Reading Indication 400100 0110000000000000 All clock values have been set clock values are being read 400101 5 decimal Thursday 400102 7 decimal July 400103 16 decimal 16 400104 98 decimal 1998 400105 9 decimal 9 a m 40010 6 25 decimal 25 minutes 40010 7 30 decimal 30 seconds 870 USE 101 10 V 2 231 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Section 8 3 Modifying Communication Port Parameters Overvie
168. he Remaining Devices Continued Procedure Continued Step Action 4 Enter the value 3 in the Node field Push lt Enter gt Result The Add Node popup disappears and the Peer Cop summary information values are set as follows GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode i a a a eS ay PEER COP Timeout 246 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error HOLD USED 13 OF 1366 WORDS Access to Node 3 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT BE SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Next Step You are now ready to configure Peer Cop for the device at Modbus Plus address 3 which for this example is a 170 ADO 340 00 16 point output module 870 USE 101 10 V 2 277 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Completing the I O Device Configuration in Peer Cop Introduction Using the procedures described previously you can complete the I O configuration in Peer Cop This section shows completed Peer Cop screens for this example Register For this example we have made the following register assignments Assignments MB Address _ Device Type Register Assignment 2 16 point discrete input 300016 3 16 point discrete output 400016 4 32 point discrete input 300017 and 300018 5 32 point discrete output 400017 and 400018 Completed The completed Pe
169. he following topics For This Topic See Page Devices on the Network 282 Configuring a Node to Exchange Data 283 Confirming the Peer Cop Summary Information 286 Specifying References for Input and Output Data 287 Defining the References for the Next Node 292 Defining References for the Supervisory Computer 297 Completing the Configuration 302 870 USE 101 10 V 2 281 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Devices on the Network Introduction This section describes the three CPUs which exchange data over the sample Modbus Plus network and the strategy used to assign node addresses The three CPUs and their functions are described in the following table CPU Function Pentium supervisory computer with an AT984 host based PLC card Receives specific input data and sends global outputs 171 CCS 760 00 Momentum M1 Processor Adapter with 172 PNN 210 22 Modbus Plus Option Adapter Controls I OBus network and exchanges data with AT984 supervisor 171 CCS 760 00 Momentum M1 Processor Adapter with 172 PNN 210 22 Modbus Plus Option Adapter Controls I OBus network and exchanges data with AT984 supervisor Devices MB Address 1 2 3 Address Strategy In this type of architecture assign the lowest network address 1 to the supervisory computer When the network initializes the supervisor will be the first device to get the token and the token rotation table will be
170. his Part This part contains the following chapters For Information On See Chapter On Page Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept 12 309 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Concept 13 361 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop 14 369 Saving to Flash with Concept 15 399 870 USE 101 10 V 2 307 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept 1 2 At a Glance Purpose This chapter explains how to configure a CPU using Concept 2 2 In This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections For This Topic See Section On Page Configuring the Processor Adapter 1 310 Configuring Option Adapter Features 2 327 Modifying Modbus Port Parameters 3 336 Configuring Ethernet Address Parameters and I O Scanning 4 344 I O Mapping the Local I O Points 5 357 870 USE 101 10 V 2 309 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Section 12 1 Configuring the Processor Adapter Overview Purpose This section describes how to configure a Momentum M1 Processor Adapter using Concept 2 2 In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Selecting an M1 Processor Adapter 311 Default Configuration Parameters 315 Changing the Range of Discrete and Register References 318 Changing the Size of the Full Logic Area 320 Understanding the Number of Segments 321 Changing the Size of the I O Map 322 Esta
171. ialog box will appear asking if you really want to save to Flash Note When you press the Yes for Save to Flash button the previous applications will be overwritten Click the Yes button Result Concept completes the save to Flash and a message appears on the screen confirming the completed save 402 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Appendices At a Glance Purpose In This Part This part provides supplemental information on Ladder Logic elements and instructions and LED flash patterns and error codes This part contains the following chapters For Information On See Appendix See Page Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions A 405 Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes B 417 870 USE 101 10 V 2 403 Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions A At a Glance Overview In This Appendix The executive firmware for the Momentum M1 Processor Adapters supports the ladder logic programming language for control applications The following core set of ladder logic elements contacts coils vertical and horizontal shorts and instructions are built into the CPU s firmware package For a detailed description of all instructions see the Ladder Logic Block Library User Guide 840 USE 101 00 This appendix contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Standard Ladder Logic Elements 406 DX Loadable Support 410 A Special STAT
172. ides of the Option Adapter The 12 pin connectors on the center of the back walls of the two units mate together The 34 pin processor extension connectors that run along the left sidewalls of the components mate together The components can be snapped together by hand no assembly tools are required A flat head screw driver is required to disassemble the unit Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 95 Assembling Momentum Components Assembling a Processor Adapter and an Option Adapter Continued Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to assemble an option adapter and an M1 Assembling an processor Option Adapter and Processor Step Action 1 Choose a clean environment to assemble the Option Adapter and processor to protect the circuitry from contamination 2 Align the two plastic snap extensions on the sides of the M1 Processor Adapter with the slots on the sides of the Option Adapter The 12 pin connectors and processor extension connectors will automatically line up when the units are in this position The two devices should be oriented so that their communication ports are facing out on the back side of the assembly CAUTION VAN PIN ALIGNMENT Proper assembly requires that the 34 pins on the processor extension connector be aligned correctly with the mating socket on the M1 processor adapter Do not connect one side and try to rotate the M1 onto the option adapter Failure
173. ign the lowest network address 1 to the CPU Strategy When the network initializes the CPU will be the first device to get the token and the token rotation table will be built with respect to the controlling device on the network 264 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining the Link and Accessing a Node Overview When you reach the default Peer Cop screen a popup menu asks you to define a link and access a node What Is a Link The link is the Modbus Plus network on which the CPU resides The only valid link value for a Momentum M1 CPU is 1 An M1 can function only on one Modbus Plus network multiple Modbus Plus links are not supported What Is a Node The node is the Modbus Plus address of one of the I O devices on the network A valid node value in our example is any number in the range 2 5 For our example we will first access the170 ADI 340 00 16 point input module at Modbus Plus address 2 CF Note Address 1 the network address of the CPU itself is not a valid node to access since the CPU does not need to access itself over the network Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 265 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Defining the Link and Accessing a Node Continued Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to define the link and access a node using the popup menu Step Action 1 With the cursor flashing in the Link value field make sure that the Link v
174. ing cyclic communication Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 155 Using the Ethernet Port Description Continued Words 24 25 Receive Buffer Errors Increments whenever a client attempts to connect to the M1 Ethernet and fails because there is no available server path The M1 Ethernet supports 14 simultaneous data paths and 2 program paths before this counter can increment This error indicates poor application architecture Transmission Errors Words 26 27 Transmit Buffer Errors Words 28 29 Silo Underflow Increments when the M1 is unable to transmit an Ethernet response frame because all frame buffers are in use For example the M1 has 16 PING reply buffers If all 16 PING buffers contain PING replies ready to be transmitted but this station s transmission is delayed because of collisions and backoff and one more PING request is received then the new PING request is discarded and the counter is incremented This error can occur for PING ARP and connection attempt to server path Although this error is theoretically possible it is not usually encountered This field counts M1 TCP IP retries All M1 clients and server use the TCP IP protocol which implements sequence numbers and timeouts Whenever TCP IP data is pushed from the M1 a subsequent acknowledgement of receipt of M1 data must be received within the timeout period or else the M1 issues a retry Retries may be the result of any
175. input and or output points on the local base unit Accessing anl O To access an I O Map screen from the Configuration Overview screen move the Map Screen cursor onto the I O Map command on the top menu and push lt Enter gt Result An I O Map screen appears with the cursor placed in the Module field The label in the top left corner of the screen identifies it as Type MOMENTUM I O Continued on next page 242 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Accessing and Editing the I O Map Continued Editing the Local I O Map To edit the Local I O Map perform the steps in the following table Step Action 1 To select the local base unit for drop 1 push lt Shift gt lt gt Result A list of all available Momentum base units appears in a window over the I O Map screen as shown below The list includes all Momentum I O bases Type MOMENTUM IO MOMENTUM 178 ADI 746 50 Number of Inputs 176 ADM 356 1x 178 ADM 376 18 Mi BASE Module 170 ADM 396 18 170 ADM 396 30 170 ADM 690 50 170 ADO 340 BA 178 ADO 350 8A he 176 ADM 696 5 is a 126 VAC 18 point input 8 point output Module Base 2 Move the cursor onto the model number of your local base unit e g the 170 ADM 370 10 24 VDC 16 point in 8 point out base in the sample screen Push lt Enter gt Result The module type and description of the base you select appears in the Drop 1 I O Map screen QUANTUM F3 F 4
176. inputs We also know that the supervisor is sending 10 words of global data parts of which will be received by both of the M1 CPUs First we will define the specific inputs to be received by the supervisor Step Action 1 Click on the Specific Input button Result The Specific Input dialog box appears 2 Enter the references for each CPU on the appropriate source line as shown below Then click lt OK gt Source Dest Ref Length Bin BCD Cancel Help Continued on next page 396 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Defining References for the Supervisory PLC Continued Defining the This supervisory CPU sends out 10 words of global output parts of which are Global Outputs received by each of the M1 CPUs Step Action 1 Click on the Global Output button Result The Global Output dialog box appears Dest Node Source Ref Length Bin BCD All Nodes si Cancel Hep In the Source Ref column type the value 400033 the first register which will be sent In the Length column type the value 10 the number of registers that will be sent Global Output x Range 400001 401872 1 32 Dest Node Source Ref Length Bin BCD AII Nodes 400033 __ 10fBiN Cancel Hep Click lt OK gt 870 USE 101 10 V 2 397 Configuring a Mo
177. ion Fast blink indicates normal Ethernet initialization at power up 3 flashes indicates no 10BASE T link pulse detected Check cable and hub 4 flashes indicates duplicate IP address detected 5 flashes indicates no IP address available Off No valid MAC address The following table contains specifications for the 171 CCC 960 30 Momentum M1 Processor Adapter Memory Internal Memory 544K bytes User Memory 18K words 984LL Exec 200k words IEC Exec Flash RAM 1 Megabyte Clock Speed 50 MHz Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 53 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 960 30 Continued Specifications Continued 984LL Input and Output References Registers 26048 Discretes 8192 Ox references 8192 1x references IEC Input and Output References Registers 11200 Discretes 4096 Ox references 4096 1x references I O Servicing Local I O Services all the points on any host Momentum I O base Watchdog timeout 335 ms Logic solve time See formula following Mechanical Weight 42 5 g 1 5 oz Dimensions HxDxW 25 9x61 02x125mm 1 01 x 2 37 x 4 86 in Material Enclosures bezels Lexan Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interactions Enclosures and
178. ion This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Accessing the Peer Cop Dialog Box 371 Adjusting the Amount of Extension Memory 373 Other Default Settings in the Peer Cop Dialog Box 374 370 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Accessing the Peer Cop Dialog Box Introduction This section describes how to access the Peer Cop dialog box in Concept 2 1 E Note The 171 CCC 960 30 and 171 CCC 980 30 require Concept 2 2 with service release 2 Accessing the Follow the steps below to access the Peer Cop from the PLC Configuration Screen Screen Step Action 1 Check the status of Peer Cop e If Peer Cop is enabled jump to step 4 e If Peer Cop is disabled continue with step 2 Example The Peer Cop status is reported in the Configuration Extensions section of the PLC Configuration Screen Here Peer Cop is disabled FAIPLC Configuration Config Extensions Data Protection Disabled Peer Cop Disabled Hot Standby Not Applicable Ethernet Not Applicable Double click on the Peer Cop field Result The Configuration Extension dialog box appears Configuration Extensions ix T Hot S ee ie I Peer Cop Ethernet Cancel Hep Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 371 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Accessing the Peer Cop Dialog Box Continue
179. is screen the following error message appears p p QUANTUM F3 _F 4 5 F 6F f Leu 8 F8 0FF F9 MOMENTUM Type MOMENTUM IO Drop 1 Available 454 Number of Inputs 16 Number of Outputs 16 M1 BASE Module Input Ref Output Ref Description System Message Maximum number of modules for this type exceeded If you are I O Mapping a Processor Adapter which supports I OBus communication stations you will need to go to a separate I O Map screen for Drop 2 That process is described in I O Mapping an OBus Network with Modsoft on page 247 870 USE 101 10 V 2 245 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft 246 870 USE 101 10 V 2 I O Mapping an I OBus Network 9 with Modsoft At a Glance Purpose This chapter describes how to I O Map an I OBus network using Modsoft 2 6 cr Note Modsoft 2 6 does not support the 171 CCC 960 20 Processor Adapter This Processor Adapter must be configured with Concept Topics This chapter contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Supporting an I O Map for an I OBus Network 248 Accessing an I O Map Screen for an I OBus Network 250 Editing the I OBus I O Map 252 870 USE 101 10 V 2 247 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Modsoft Supporting an I O Map for an I OBus Network Introduction I O Map Reserved Words The 171 CCS 760 00 and 171 CCC 760 10 Processor Adapters have an I OBus communication port tha
180. ision 3 ITOF Signed unsigned integer to floating point conversion 3 FTOI Floating point to signed unsigned integer conversion 3 EMTH Performs 38 math operations including floating point 3 math operations and extra integer math operations such as square root Ladder Logic Subroutine Instructions JSR Jumps from scheduled logic scan to a ladder logic 2 subroutine LAB Labels the entry point of a ladder logic subroutine 1 RET Returns from the subroutine to scheduled logic 1 Continued on next page 408 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions Standard Ladder Logic Elements Continued Standard Ladder Logic Symbol Meaning Nodes Consumed Instructions Other Special Purpose Instructions Continued CKSM Calculates any of four types of checksum 3 operations CRC 16 LRC straight CKSM and binary add MSTR Specifies a function from a menu of 3 networking operations PID2 Performs proportional integral derivative 3 calculations for closed loop control TBLK Moves a block of data from a table to 3 another specified block area BLKT Moves a block of registers to specified 3 locations in a table XMIT Allows CPU to act as a Modbus master 3 870 USE 101 10 V 2 409 Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions DX Loadable Support Introduction Loaded on Page 0 Limited Functionality M1 Support Saved to Flash The M1 CPUs can use DX l
181. it contains a value of 0 or 1 A value of zero indicates a general communication failure for example no power to the module or a break in its input cable A value of 1 indicates that communication is possible but the I OBus ID received from the module does not match the module type contained in the traffic cop for that position 174 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the I OBus Port Guidelines for I OBus Networks Overview Length Distance Between Nodes Number of Devices CF Acceptable Slave Devices Unacceptable Slave Devices This section gives guidelines for creating an l OBus network using a Momentum CPU as bus master The maximum distance between the Momentum CPU master and the farthest slave is 13 km 8 mi The maximum distance between nodes is 400 m 1300 ft A network may consist of as many as 256 nodes including one Momentum CPU bus master and up to 255 slave I O devices Note Processors that support IEC are limited to a maximum number of 1408 used I O points regardless of the number of modules An l OBus slave device can be A Momentum I O base with a 170 INT 110 00 Interbus Communication Adapter mounted on it A Modicon Terminal Block I O module enabled for Interbus communications A standard Interbus module designed by a third party manufacturer The I OBus network does not support Interbus compatible devices that require the Interbus PCP protocol Conti
182. k which will contain the health bits for each of the IO Scanner transactions that you intend to configure If you designate a 3x register the health bits for 64 transactions maximum will be stored in 4 contiguous registers starting at the address you specify If you designate a 1x register the health bits will be stored in 64 contiguous discrete registers A health bit is set only if the associated transaction has completed successfully within the last health timeout period for that transaction see below When the PLC is started all configured transactions have their respective health bit preset to 1 If the transaction subsequently fails then the health bit is cleared after the programmed health timeout period has expired Continued on next page 350 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Configuring I O Continued IP Address Type the IP address of the slave module in the IP address column This address will be stored in a pull down menu so that you can use it in another row by clicking on the down arrow and selecting it as shown Ethernet I O Scanner Unit ID If the slave module is an I O device attached to the specified slave module use the Unit ID column to indicate the device number Health Timeout Use this column to specify the length of time in ms to try the transaction before timing out Valid values are 0 65 000
183. lance Purpose This chapter describes how to assemble and disassemble a Momentum M1 CPU using the following components Processor Adapter I O Base Option Adapter Label It also describes how to install batteries in the Option Adapter In This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections For Information On See Section On Page Assembling a CPU 1 88 Assembling a CPU with an Option Adapter 2 94 Installing Batteries in an Option Adapter 3 105 Labeling the CPU 4 107 870 USE 101 10 V 2 87 Assembling Momentum Components Section 3 1 Assembling a CPU Overview Purpose This section describes how to assemble a Processor Adapter with an I O base and how to disassemble them In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Assembling a Processor Adapter and I O Base 89 Disassembling a Processor Adapter from an I O Base 92 88 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Assembling Momentum Components Assembling a Processor Adapter and I O Base Overview A Processor Adapter can be snapped directly onto a Momentum I O base making connections at three points The plastic snap extensions on the two sides of the M1 unit fit into the two slots on the sides of the I O base The 12 pin connectors on the two units mate together The components can be snapped together by hand no assembly tools are required
184. laying your two Mode options S MS DOS Prompt COMMAND LERI A Default Bridge F3 F 4 5 FeFe 8F8 0FF F9 PORTS Bridge Mode N Number Mode Data Parity Stop Baud Head Slot Address Delay Protocol Bits Bits MODBUS 01 8 EVEN 1 9600 fo 1 10 ms 02 RTU 8 EUEN 1 9600 9 1 10 ms RS232 Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 235 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Mode and Data Bits Continued Procedure Continued Step Action 2 Use an arrow key to toggle the cursor onto the desired Mode selection in the popup window then push lt Enter gt Result The Port editor screen is updated with the Mode type you have specified the corresponding Data Bit value appears and the cursor moves to the Parity column For example if you change Modbus port 1 from RTU mode to ASCII mode the Data Bit value also automatically changes from 8 to 7 as shown below 2 MS DOS Prompt COMMAND Lord Default Bridge F3 _F 4 F 5 _F6 F Leu 8 F8 OFF F 9 PORTS Bridge Mode N Number Mode Data Parity Stop Baud Head Slot Address Delay Protocol Bits Bits MODBUS 01 ASCII 7 1 9600 1 10 ms 02 RTU 8 1 9600 1 10 ms R 232 236 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing Parity Introduction From the Port editor screen a port can be configured for even odd or no parity checking The facto
185. ll groups of devices to be linked by short lengths of cable supporting up to 64 nodes on a single section of cable Cluster Mode A cluster may consist of up to eight Momentum devices A network may contain up to eight clusters The cable between devices in a cluster may be 10 in to 3 ft The cable between clusters or between a cluster and the trunk must be at least 10 ft The maximum length of the network continues to be 1500 ft The maximum number of devices in a network continues to be 64 cr Note Only Momentum devices are allowed in a cluster 64 Nodes When a Modbus Plus network consists entirely of Momentum devices then a single section of cable may support 64 nodes instead of the standard 32 nodes Example If a single SA85 is added to a network of Momentum modules the network is no longer Momentum only but a mixture of devices Each cable section must be limited to 32 nodes Cable sections must be connected by a repeater 182 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Two Types of Modbus Plus Networks 1 O Networks and Supervisory Networks AN 1 O Networks CF Supervisory Networks In a distributed control environment Modbus Plus can be used in either of two ways As an I O network As a supervisory network CAUTION CRITICAL I O MUST BE SERVICED IN AN I O NETWORK Design your Modbus Plus architecture to meet the needs of your network Modbus Plus can offer deterministic
186. llowing table lists the flash pattern of the Run LED on the Momentum Pattern and Error Processor Adapters It also lists the associated codes in hex format Codes Number of Blinks Code hex Error Continuous 0000 Requested Kernel mode 2 080B ram error during sizing 080C run output active failed 082E MB command handler stack error 0835 Main loop broken 0836 Power down Power holdup 0837 Power down reset absent 3 072B master config write bad Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 417 Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes Run LED Flash Pattern and Error Codes Continued Number of Blinks Code hex Error 4 0607 modbus cmd buffer overflow 0608 modbus cmd length is zero 0609 modbus abort command error 0614 mbp bus interface error 0615 bad mbp response opcode 0616 timeout waiting for mbp 0617 mbp out of synchronization 0618 mbp invalid path 0619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 061E bad external uart hardware 061F bad external uart interrupt 0620 bad receive comm state 0621 bad transmit comm state 0622 bad comm state trn_asc 0623 bad comm state trn_rtu 0624 bad comm state rcv_rtu 0625 bad comm state rcv_asc 0626 bad modbus state tmr0_evt 0627 bad modbus state trn int 0628 bad modbus state rcv int 0631 bad interrupt 0637 Bad I OBus transmit state 0638 Bad I OBus receive state 5 0503 ram
187. lugs The illustration below shows the pinout for the Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 Terminating RJ45 Resistor Plugs RJ45 Connector 1 1 4W 1210hm 2 1 3 4 1 4W 1210hm 5 1 The illustration below shows the pinout for the Modbus RS485 Terminating RJ45 Shunt Plugs RJ45 Connector 1 an 140 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Ethernet Port 5 At a Glance In This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections For This Topic See Section On Page Ethernet Port 1 142 Establishing a Connection with an Ethernet Module 2 158 Accessing Embedded Web Pages 3 162 171 CCC 960 30 AND 171 CCC 980 30 Web Pages 4 164 870 USE 101 10 V 2 141 Using the Ethernet Port Section 5 1 Ethernet Port Purpose Ethernet ports are available with 171 CCC 960 20 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 960 30 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 980 20 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 980 30 Processor Adapters In This Section This Section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Ethernet Port 143 Network Design Considerations 144 Security 146 Cabling Schemes 147 Pinouts 148 Assigning Ethernet Address Parameters 149 Using BOOTP Lite to Assign Address Parameters 152 Reading Ethernet Network Statistics 153 870 USE 101 10 V 2 142 Using the Ethernet Port Ethernet Port Introduction The Ethernet p
188. lus communications Three LED indicators Battery compartment Address switches Illustration The illustration below shows the LED indicators address switches battery compartment and Modbus Plus connectors Label Description 1 9 pin D shell connector for Modbus Plus port B 2 Array of three LED indicators 3 Battery compartment door 4 Address switches for Modbus Plus 5 9 pin D shell connector for Modbus Plus port A Continued on next page 80 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Option Adapters Front Panel Components Continued LED Indicators This Option Adapter has three LED indicators Their functions are described in the table below LED Status Function MB ACT Green Indicates activity on one or both of the Modbus Plus ports see the flash pattern table below Off No activity on either Modbus Plus port ERRA Red Indicates a communications failure on Modbus Plus port A Off No problems detected on Modbus Plus port A ERRB Red Indicates a communications failure on Modbus Plus port B Off No problems detected on Modbus Plus port B If you are not using redundant cabling on the Modbus Plus link i e if only one of the ports is being used the Error LED for the unused port will be on constantly when Modbus Plus communication occurs on the network Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 81 Option Adapters Front Panel Components Continued MB ACT Flash This table
189. lus node Pattern Meaning 6 flashes s This is the normal operating state for the node It is receiving and passing the network token All nodes on a healthy network flash this pattern 1 flash s The node is offline just after power up or after exiting the 6 flashes s mode In this state the node monitors the network and builds a table of active nodes After being in this state for 5s the node attempts to go to its normal operating state indicated by 6 flashes s 2 flashes then OFF for 2s The node detects the token being passed among the other nodes but never receives the token Check the network for an open circuit or defective termination 3 flashes then OFF for 1 7s The node is not detecting any tokens being passed among the other nodes It periodically claims the token but cannot find another node to which to pass it Check the network for an open circuit or defective termination 4 flashes then OFF for 1 4s The node has detected a valid message from a node using a network address identical to its own address The node remains in this state for as long as it continues to detect the duplicate address If the duplicate address is not detected for 5s the node changes to its 1 flash s mode ON Indicates an invalid node address OFF Possible fault with Modbus Plus Option Adapter Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 75 Option Adapters Front Panel Components Continu
190. meters 114 Modbus Port 2 23 69 120 auto logout 69 autologout feature with RS232 122 changing protocol from RS232 to RS485 241 343 parameters 121 pinouts 70 Modbus RS485 120 cable 129 connectors 132 four wire cabling schemes 123 pinouts 135 terminating devices 134 two wire cabling schemes 126 Momentum M1E Web Pages 165 Momentum M1E Welcome Page 165 links 165 N Network design considerations 144 NOE 771 x0 Embedded web server 162 O Option Adapter batteries installation 105 422 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Index purpose 66 reserving and monitoring a battery coil in Concept 328 reserving and monitoring a battery coil in Modsoft 224 communication ports 66 configuring in Concept 327 configuring in Modsoft 223 purpose 65 time of day clock 66 reading in Concept 335 reading in Modsoft 231 setting the time in Modsoft 228 setting time in Concept 334 setting up in Concept 331 setting up in Modsoft 226 P Peer Cop 200 Concept accessing Peer Cop dialog box 371 health timeout 374 Last Value setting 375 specifying references for input data 380 specifying references for output data 384 Modsoft accessing a node 265 accessing configuration extension screen 259 adjusting amount of extension memory 259 defining a link 265 On Error setting 268 specifying references for input data 272 timeout 268 Processor Adapter configuring with Concept 310 configuring with Mods
191. n Adapter has a time of day clock To use this feature you must reserve a block of eight 4x registers This section describes how to reserve those registers using Concept 2 1 CF Note The 171 CCC 960 30 and 171 CCC 980 30 require Concept 2 2 with service release 2 Reserving To reserve registers for the TOD clock perform the steps in the following table Registers for the TOD Clock Step Action 1 From the Configure menu select Specials OR double click on any field in the Specials region of the dialog box Result The Specials dialog box appears Specials Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 331 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Setting up the Time of Day Clock Continued Reserving i A Registers for the Step ction TOD Clock 2 Click the check box next to Time Of Day Continued Specials 3 Type a number the first in a series of eight from the range of available 4xxxx references in the corresponding field Observe the maximum register value Example If you want registers 400100 400107 reserved for the TOD clock type 100 Specials 4 Click the lt OK gt button Result The registers you have specified are displayed on the PLC Configuration screen Continued on next page 332 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Setting up the Time of Day Clock Continued Next Step Setting the time CF
192. n bits Outbits Status Edit _ 1 0 _Edit Momentum 170 0 2 0 Bus 0 0 Edit Ea ff Pl Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 363 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Concept Accessing an I O Map Screen for an I OBus Network Continued Procedure Continued Next Step Step Action Click the Edit button on the I OBus line of the I O Map dialog Result The Remote I O Bus Drop dialog appears Remote I O Bus Drop x Drop Module Modules 0 Bitsin 0 Bits Out 0 Bits In 0 Bits Out 0 Status Table Used IO Points 0 Delete Params Cut Copy Paste Detected Out Ref Out End Description Editing the I OBus I O map 364 870 USE 101 10 V 2 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Concept Editing the I OBus I O Map Overview The maximum number of modules which can be I O Mapped on the I OBus network depends on your Processor Adapter and its executive Processor Adapter Executive Max Modules Max I O Bits 171 CCS 760 00 984 128 2048 IEC 44 1408 171 CCC 760 10 984 128 2048 IEC 44 1408 171 CCC 960 20 984 256 4096 IEC 128 1408 171 CCC 960 30 984 256 4096 IEC 128 1408 Procedure To enter I O bases or Interbus I O modules using the Remote I OBus Drop dialog perform the steps in the following table Step Action 1
193. n offers three options for configuring the Ethernet port on an M1 Processor Adapter Specify IP Address Use Bootp Server Disable Ethernet This option allows you to type the IP address gateway and subnet mask in the text boxes in the upper right hand corner of the screen Ethernet I O Scanner 255 255 255 0 Use Bootp Server This is the default Click this radio button if you want the address parameters to be assigned by a Bootp server If you select this option the address parameter text boxes in the upper right hand corner of the screen will be grayed out They will not display the actual address parameters 255 255 255 0 Disable Ethernet cr Click this radio button if you want to disable the Ethernet port Disabling the port will reduce the scan time for the Processor Adapter Note DISABLING ETHERNET RESULTS IN LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS If you choose the Disable Ethernet option you will no longer be able to communicate with the adapter via the Ethernet port Programming must then be done via an RS485 232 port or via a Modbus Plus port 870 USE 101 10 V 2 347 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Setting Ethernet Address Parameters Overview If you choose to specify the IP address you should complete all three text boxes in the upper right hand corner of the dialog box P Address Gateway Subnet Mask CAUTION AN POTENTIAL FOR DUPLICATE ADDRESSES Obtain a valid
194. n the Processor Adapter with the slots on the sides of the I O base The 12 pin connectors will automatically line up when the units are in this position The two devices should be oriented so their communication ports are facing out on the back side of the assembly Continued on next page 90 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Assembling Momentum Components Assembling a Processor Adapter and I O Base Continued Procedure Assembling a Step Action Processor 4 Push the Processor Adapter onto the base gently pressing the locking tabs Adapter and an inward I O Base Continued Result The locking tabs on each side of the Processor Adapter slide inside the I O base and out through the locking slot The 12 pin connectors on the two units are mated to each other in the process i Next Step Once the Processor Adapter has been assembled it can be mounted on a DIN rail or surface mounted inside a panel enclosure A Momentum M1 CPU assembly is classified as open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure and direct access must be restricted to qualified service personnel For a detailed description of installation procedures and grounding considerations refer to the Momentum I O Bases User Manual 870 USE 002 00 870 USE 101 10 V 2 91 Assembling Momentum Components Disassembling a Processor Adapter from an I O Base Overview A
195. nated with a terminating shunt which connects the transmit pair to the receiver pair color code is blue Description Part Number Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 Terminating RJ45 Resistor Plugs 170 XTS 021 00 pack of 2 Modbus RS485 Terminating RJ45 Shunt Plugs 170 XTS 042 00 Continued on next page 126 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Two Wire Cabling Schemes for Modbus RS485 Networks Continued Cable All devices are connected with the same pin for pin cable such as the Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 Short Interconnect Cable or any Cat 5 4 Twisted Pair Ethernet cable AWG 24 A master slave system using 2 wire cabling does not require the special master communication cable Description Part Number Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 Short Interconnect Cable 170 MCI 020 10 Color code black Multimaster The following illustration shows components used in a multimaster slave network Slave Cabling Each Momentum module must include a Processor Adapter or Option Adapter with a Modbus RS485 port Master Slave Master Slave Slave Label Description Part Number 1 Terminating resistor plug 170 XTS 021 00 Color code red 2 Modbus RS485 connector T DB9 base 170 XTS 040 00 3 Modbus Plus Modbus RS485 Short
196. nclosures bezels Lexan Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interactions Enclosures and bezels are made of Lexan a polycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA RFI Susceptibility immunity Meets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 63 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 980 30 Continued Specifications Continued Scantime Formula for 984LL Exec Cre Example Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of protection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric strength Ethernet is isolated from logic common 500 VDC Ground continuity 30 A test on the exposed metal connector Agency Approvals e UL508 CSA CUL CE e FM classi div2 The following formula applies to the M1E Processor Adapter with the 984LL exec Scan time
197. ndicators Processor The Momentum M1E 171 CCC 960 30 AND 171 CCC 980 30 Processor Adapter Adapter LED IEC modules have three LED indicators The LED indicators are described in the Indicators table below LED Function RUN Indicates the run state of the M1E Processor Adapter IEC module LAN ACT Always appear to be on continuously LAN ST Always appear to be on continuously I O Status LED There are three rows of 16 I O Status LED indicators Indicators CF Note Each I O base has a custom LED display that provides information about the I O Status For information about the I O Status for your I O base refer to LED Illustration and Description for your I O base in 870 Use 002 00 V 2 Momentum I O Base User Guide 870 USE 101 10 V 2 170 Using the I OBus Port At a Glance Purpose Three Momentum components offer I OBus master capabilities 171 CCS 760 00 Processor Adapter 171 CCC 760 10 Processor Adapter 171 CCC 960 20 and 171 CCC 960 30 Processor Adapters This section describes the I OBus port explains how I OBus works provides guidelines for creating OBus networks with Momentum components and describes recommended cable accessories In This Chapter This chapter contains the following topics For This Topic See Page I O Bus Port 172 How OBus Works 173 Network Status Indication in the M1 Ethernet Module 174 Guidelin
198. ng the Ethernet Port Assigning Ethernet Address Parameters Continued When the Processor Adapter is Ethernet 7 1 0 Scanner Ethernet Configuration Power up with a Configuration for Specify IP i Pane C Use Bootp Server C Disable Ethernet If the processor adapter is powered up without battery backup and its IP address was previously saved to flash the adapter will listen for any Bootp messages but will not will not issue any Bootp requests Instead it will use the IP address that is specified in the configuration Then three ARP broadcasts are made five seconds apart to check for duplicate a IP address Then three gratuitous ARP broadcasts are made two seconds apart with the station s MAC address and IP address To Retain the IP After setting the module s IP address you must save it to flash memory if you want Address this setting to be retained when power is removed from the module This is necessary even if the module is attached to a ring adapter that provides battery back up See Saving to Flash with Concept on page 399 870 USE 101 10 V 2 151 Using the Ethernet Port Using BOOTP Lite to Assign Address Parameters A CAUTION INCORRECT MAC ADDRESS HAZARD Be sure to verify the MAC address of the target device before invoking BOOTP Lite If you do not enter the correct parameters of the target controller it will run in its old configuration An incorrect MAC address may also
199. nt should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 49 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 960 20 Continued Specifications Continued Scantime Formula for 984LL Exec Example Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of protection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric strength Ethernet is isolated from logic common 500 VDC Ground continuity 30 A test on the exposed metal connector Agency Approvals e UL508 CSA CUL CE e FM classi div2 The following formula applies to the M1E Processor Adapter with the 984LL exec Scan time 0 25 msec ethernet device 0 002 msec word 0 13 msec K of logic 0 40 msec MBPlustime Note e Modbus Plus communications will slow the M1E If there is no MB ring card then MBPlustime 0 e If there is a MB ring card then each scan will be extended 0 3 Msec even if there is no message e Modbus Messages will add from 1 to 2 msec per scan depending on the length of the message Note e The formula above presumes that all MSTR blocks and all configured connections are set to go as fast as possible In this case the M1E will attempt to exchange data with each device
200. nued on next page 378 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Changing the Peer Cop Summary Information Continued Procedure Continued Next Step Step Action Select the Health Timeout default value 500 with your mouse and type the new value 240 in its place OR use the horizontal slider to change the value Result The new Health Timeout value is 240 C Clear on timeout Hold on timeout Input Output Peer Cop x Expansion Size 100 EI onino 3 Health timeout msec 240 xt gt j Last value Global Specific Output OK Cancel Help Specifying references for input data 870 USE 101 10 V 2 379 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Specifying References for Input Data Introduction This section describes how to specify the references for input data In this example you will start by accessing the device at Modbus Plus address 2 which is a 170 ADI 340 00 16 point input module Device When you use Peer Cop to handle a Modbus Plus I O architecture you need to be Requirements aware of the type of I O you are configuring at each network address Peer Cop does not know that the device at address 2 is a discrete 16 point input module You need to know that a specific input reference with a length of one word 16 bits is required to handle
201. nued on next page 382 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Specifying References for Input Data Continued Procedure Continued Next Step Step Action Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the device at address 4 using the settings in the figure below Then click lt OK gt Specific Input x __Source Dest Ref Length Bin BCD Cancel Help Specifying output references 870 USE 101 10 V 2 383 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Specifying References for Output Data Introduction This section describes how to specify the references for output data In this example you will start by accessing the device at Modbus Plus address 3 which is a 170 ADO 340 00 16 point output module Device When you use Peer Cop to handle a Modbus Plus I O architecture you need to Requirements know which type of I O you are configuring at each network address and how many input or output references each device requires In this example we will create a specific output reference with a length of one word 16 bits We also will assign a 4x register 400016 as a specific input to the CPU When the the 170 ADO 340 00 sends input data to the CPU it will be sent to this register Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to define the specific output Step Action 1 Click on the Specific Output button
202. nued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 175 Using the I OBus Port Guidelines for I OBus Networks Continued Network Scheme _ The slave devices are distributed along a trunk as shown in the illustration below lt 13 km 8 mile Maximum Cable Run oe Maximum of 256 Nodes 400 m 1300 ft AHG CPU Momentum 1 0 Terminal Block I O Standard Interbus I O OBus Master with Interbus Adapter with Interbus S Device 176 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the I OBus Port Cable Accessories Overview Low Profile Cables Modicon provides several cabling solutions for l OBus Low profile cables in two lengths A 1m cable with high profile rear shell Aconnector kit for building custom length Interbus cables This section describes those solutions For side by side mounting of the CPU with Interbus I O modules on a DIN rail or wall Modicon provides two specially molded low profile cables Part Number Length 170 MCI 007 00 11 4 cm 4 5 in 170 MCI 100 01 100 cm 39 in These cables have a male 9 in D shell connector on one end and a female 9 pin D shell on the other The male connector plugs into the female I OBus port on the Processor Adapter and the female connector plugs into the male connector on the left side of a 170 INT 110 00 Interbus Communications Adapter on an I O base Additional cables can then be used to connect a series of I O modules via their Interobus communica
203. nued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 185 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Standard Cabling Schemes Continued Momentum This illustration depicts a Modbus Plus network constructed with a Momentum CPU Network and Momentum I O One cable segment supports all 64 nodes No repeater is used 450 m 1500 ft with No Repeaters Up to 64 Nodes Device Device Device Device 2 17 3 64 M1 CPU Momentum I O Momentum I O Momentum I O with Modbus Plus with Modbus Plus with Modbus Plus with Modbus Plus Mixture of This illustration depicts a mixture of Momentum and other Modbus Plus devices Devices Three repeaters are used to connect four cable sections 1800 m 6000 ft Using b RR85 Repeaters RR85 RR85 RR85 Repeater Repeater Repeater 186 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Cluster Mode Cabling Schemes Introduction Length of Network Number of Devices in Network Clusters ina Network In cluster mode Momentum I O devices may be placed in small groups connected by much shorter lengths of cable than in standard Modbus Plus cabling schemes You may use clusters and standard single nodes in the same network The maximum length of cable from one end of the network to the other is 1500 ft 450 m if no repeaters are used You can use up to three Modicon RR85 Repeaters to extend the cable to up to 6000 ft 1800 m Each repeater allows you to extend the cable 1500 ft
204. oadable instructions which support optional software products that can be purchased for special applications DX loadables provide the user with special ladder logic functions The code for DX loadables gets loaded into the Page 0 area Thus for every word of DX loadable that is loaded one word of Page 0 becomes unavailable for other use such as application logic DX loadables are limited in the functionality they can provide because they do not provide storage for variables and are limited in their size M1 supports only loadables targeted for 80x86 microprocessors running in 16 bit real mode that have not made any hard coded hardware assumptions e g the address and format of the TOD clock Obviously there must be enough available memory to fit the loadable Since DX loadables are stored in Page 0 memory they are saved whenever a save to Flash operation is initiated 410 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions A Special STAT Instruction Overview Avoid Discretes Specify Length Diagram of STAT Block A special version of the STAT instruction has been developed to support Momentum M1 CPUs The STAT instruction accesses a specified number of words in a status table in the CPU s system memory Here vital diagnostic information regarding the health of the CPU and the I OBus I O under its control is posted From the STAT instruction you can copy some or all of the status wo
205. ocessor Adapters Front Panel illustration Introduction This section provides an illustration of a typical M1 Processor Adapter Illustration A typical Processor Adapter is shown in the following illustration 171 CCS 780 00 Label Description 1 Standard port connector 2 Optional second port connector LED indicators 870 USE 101 10 V 2 21 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters Overview of Ports Introduction Each Processor Adapter is equipped with at least one Modbus or Ethernet port Some models also have a second port The ports allow the Processor Adapter to communicate with Programming panels Network I O points under its control Network supervisory computers Ports Per The following table indicates which ports are available with each Processor Processor Adapter Adapter Port 1 Port 2 Processor Ethernet Modbus Modbus I O Bus Adapter Port RS 232 RS 485 Port 171 CCS 700 00 x 171 CCS 700 10 x o 171 CCS 760 00 x x WITT Ze e cl nei ler 171 CCC 760 10 x x Rutger lhe 171 CCS 780 00 x x 171 CCS 780 00 171 CCC 780 10 x x A 171 CCC 960 20 x x OO AUU TAA TT 171 CCC 960 30 x x 171 CCC 980 20 x x 1 Port 1 171 CCC 980 30 x x 2 Port2 Ethernet Port Modbus Port 1 The Ethern
206. oft 207 default configuration parameters in Concept 315 default configuration parameters in Modsoft 212 Flash RAM 24 front panel diagram 21 internal memory 24 power supply 27 R Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes 417 S saving to Flash Concept procedure 400 Modsoft options 304 procedure 305 purpose 303 399 Stop bit 122 Supervisory network 145 Support Page 169 links 170 W Web server Accessing the home page 163 Embedded web pages 162 Features 163 Internet Explorer 163 Netscape Navigator 163 870 USE 101 10 V 2 423 Index 424 870 USE 101 10 V 2 31002674 Modicon Square D and Telemecanique are PLC brand names from Schneider These products are sold in the US by Square D in Canada Latin America Europe Africa Asia Pacific and Middle East by Schneider in Germany by AEG Schneider Electric in China and Persian Gulf by Schneider Electric in South Africa by ASA Systems Automation in Austria by Online Schneider Electric Inc Schneider Electric GmbH One High Street Steinheimer Strasse 117 North Andover MA 01845 D 63500 Seligenstadt Tel 1 508 794 0800 Tel 49 6182 81 2584 Fax 1 508 975 9400 Fax 49 6182 81 2860 Schneider Electric S A 245 Route des Lucioles BP147 F 06903 Sophia Antipolis Cedex Tel 33 92 96 20 00 Fax 33 93 65 37 15 4 00 870 USE 101 10 V 2 2000 Schneider Electric Inc All rights reserved
207. om your system administrator Type the address or URL in the Address or Location box in the browser window Once you do this the Schneider Automation Web Utility home page will appear see next section 870 USE 101 10 V 2 163 Using the Ethernet Port Section 5 4 171 CCC 960 30 AND 171 CCC 980 30 Web Pages Overview Introduction This Section shows the embedded Web pages contained in the Momentum M1E 171 CCC 960 30 AND 171 CCC 980 30 IEC modules and a brief description of each page What s in this This Section contains the following topic Section Topic Page Momentum M1E Web Pages 166 870 USE 101 10 V 2 164 Using the Ethernet Port Momentum M1E Web Pages Momentum M1E The Momentum M1E Welcome Page provides links to the Controller Configuration Welcome Page Ethernet Statistics I O Status and Support Pages Link Results Controller Status Displays the CPU Configuration page Ethernet Statistics Displays the Ethernet Module Statistics with the Reset Counters page I O Status Displays the I O Status and Configuration page Support Displays contact information for technical assistance sales and feedback E Welcome to the M1E Web Server Netscape File Edit View Go Window Help ort Oe ao wt FE tw Bookmarks Location http eio4 4 What related Schneider Electric Momentum Web Server
208. on with an Ethernet Module Overview Introduction This Section presents an overview of the procedure for connecting to an ethernet module that is used as a web server For a complete description of the Quantum 140 NOE 771 x0 module refer to Quantum NOE 771 x0 Ethernet Modules User Guide 840 USE 116 00 Version 1 0 CF Note To establish a connection with an Ethernet module using the Network Options Ethernet Tester you must know the module s IP network address or host name What s in this This Section contains the following topic Section Topic Page Establishing a Connection with an Ethernet Module 159 870 USE 101 10 V 2 158 Using the Ethernet Port Establishing a Connection with an Ethernet Module Procedure Perform the following steps to establish a connection with an Ethernet module using the Network Options Ethernet Tester Step Action 1 From the initial menu select File and choose New from the options in the pulldown menu or click on the new connection button in the toolbar gt Network Opt View Help Network Options Clear statistics Get statistics Write register Read register Disconnect Connect Create new connection This will bring up the Remote IP Address dialog box Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 159 Using the Ethernet Port Establishing a Connection with an Ethernet Module continued
209. once per scan e f several devices are configured to communicate on a timed basis that is substantially larger than the scan time calculated then the communications to those devices will be spread out over several scans See Example below You have 50 ENT modules connected to a single M1E with a configured time of 50 Msec each a total of 4k user logic and no MB card The scan time for all modules configured as fast as possible would be 12 5 Msec 0 52 Msec 0 40 Msec 13 42 Msec However since the M1E will only communicate to 1 4 of the modules 12 5 Msec 50 Msec 1 4 on any given scan the corrected average scan time would be 1 4 x 12 5 0 52 0 40 4 1 Msec 50 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 960 30 Overview This section describes the 171 CCC 960 30 Processor Adapter including key features an illustration and specifications CF Note The 171 CCC 960 30 units are shipped with the latest IEC exec installed i Note The 984LL exec used in the 171 CCC 960 30 will not operate in a 171 CCC 960 20 Key Features The key features of this Processor Adapter are Ethernet port OBus port 544K bytes of internal memory 50 MHz clock speed cr Note The Ethernet port connector looks like a Modbus port connector Do not attempt to use an Ethernet adapter as a Modbus unit Do not attempt to place a Modbus connector in an Ethernet connector Continued on next pag
210. onnector Agency Approvals e UL508 CSA CUL CE e FMclass1 div2 870 USE 101 10 V 2 43 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 780 10 Overview This section describes the 171 CCC 780 10 Processor Adapter including key features an illustration and specifications Key Features The key features of this Processor Adapter are Modbus Port 1 Modbus Port 2 512K bytes of internal memory 32 MHz clock speed cr Note The Modbus port connector looks like a Ethernet port connector Do not attempt to use an Modbus adapter as an Ethernet unit Do not attempt to place an Ethernet connector in a Modbus connector Illustration The connectors and LED indicators are shown in the following illustration 1 TR gan ERR AA dAdASASESVTLES is i gt ps EN RANAN Ti CPU Las Sched Ta qi Schneider TSX Momentum A Automation Inc anes F Label Description 1 Modbus Port 1 connector 2 Modbus Port 2 connector 3 LED indicators Continued on next page 44 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 780 10 Continued LED Indicators This Processor Adapter has two LED indicators RUN and COM ACT Their functions are described in the table below LED Status Function Start up Both Single flash Indicates good health RUN Green On continuously when the CPU has received power and is solving logic Fl
211. ontinued Step Action Since you are addressing the device at address 1 you will use the line for Source 1 Type the value 400023 on that line in the Dest Ref column Specific Output x Range 400001 401872 1 32 e Source Ref Length Bin BCD z Type the value 8 in the Length column indicating that 8 words of data will be exchanged In this case we will leave the default BIN setting Click lt OK gt Specific Output x Range 400001 401872 1 32 Dest Node Source Ref Length Bin BCD BIN Continued on next page 390 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Specifying References for Input and Output Data Continued Defining the Now the M1 needs to be Peer Copped to receive five words of global data from the Global Inputs supervisory PLC at Modbus Plus address 1 Follow the steps in the table specify the input reference Step Action 1 Click on the Global Input button Result The Global Input dialog box appears 1 64 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ba Clear Subfields 2 the CPU will use to store the input data Global Input x 1 64 Range 400001 401872 1 32 1 32 Index Length Bin BCD Dest Ref _ 400001 O NDNAAUN Clear Subfields i Since this device will be receiving data from the CPU at address 1 you do not need to change the default sending addre
212. ontinued M1E I O Status The I O Status page enables you to check your I O Status It contains the following Page links and LED indicators The following table describes the links contained within the I O Status page Link Results Home Returns you to the Home Page Controller Status Displays the CPU Configuration page Ethernet Statistics Displays the Ethernet Module Statistics with the Reset Counters page Support Displays contact information for technical assistance sales and feedback 4 M1E I O Statistics Netscape File Edit View Go Window Help a Ort fe A uar O Bookmarks Location http eio4 iostat htm 4 N What s related fess 7 MIE 1 0 STATUS a RUN Schneider ETHERNET Automation Inc LAN ACT LAN T71CCC 27 2 HARA Home Controller Status Ethernet Statistics Support Schneider Automation Inc 1998 2000 v1 0 E Applet com schneider automation sysdiag qbf M110 Applet running Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 167 Using the Ethernet Port Momentum M1E Web Pages Continued Ethernet The Ethernet Statistics page enables you to monitor ethernet information such as Statistics MAC Address receive transmit statistics and check functioning errors It contains the following links Link Results Home Returns you to the
213. ontinuously or blinking Indicates activity on Ethernet port Off No activity on Ethernet port LAN ST Green On continuously during normal operation Fast blink indicates normal Ethernet initialization at power up 3 flashes indicates no 10BASE T link pulse detected Check cable and hub 4 flashes indicates duplicate IP address detected 5 flashes indicates no IP address available Off No valid MAC address Specifications The following table contains specifications for the 171 CCC 980 30 Momentum M1 Processor Adapter Memory Internal Memory 544K bytes User Memory 18K words 984LL Exec 200k words IEC Exec Flash RAM 1 Megabyte Clock Speed 50 MHz Continued on next page 62 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 980 30 Continued Specifications Continued 984LL Input and Output References Registers 26048 Discretes 8192 Ox references 8192 1x references IEC Input and Output References Registers 11200 Discretes 4096 0x references 4096 1x references I O Servicing Local I O Services all the points on any host Momentum I O base Watchdog timeout 335 ms Logic solve time See formula following Mechanical Weight 42 5 g 1 5 oz Dimensions HxDxW 25 9x61 02x125mm 1 01 x 2 37 x 4 86 in Material E
214. ord discrete input 0403_IOBUS Four word discrete bidirectional 0431_IOBUS Four word analog output 0432_IOBUS Four word analog input 0433_IOBUS Four word analog bidirectional Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 255 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Modsoft Editing the I OBus I O Map Continued Generic InterBus Module Identifier Identifier Code 1 0 Type Codes Continued 0501_IOBUS Five word discrete output 0502_IOBUS Five word discrete input 0503_IOBUS Five word discrete bidirectional 0531_IOBUS Five word analog output 0532_IOBUS Five word analog input 0533_IOBUS Five word analog bidirectional 0633_IOBUS Eight word analog bidirectional 1233_IOBUS Sixteen word analog bidirectional Moving Between To move from one I O Map page to the another use the lt PageUp gt and Pages lt PageDown gt keys lt PageDown gt opens the next page e g to move from page 1 to page 2 lt PageUp gt opens the previous page e g to move from page 2 to page 1 256 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Modsoft with Peer Cop 10 At a Glance Purpose Communication transactions over Modbus Plus are defined in Modsoft 2 6 by a configuration tool called Peer Cop This section uses examples to explain how to use Peer Cop to configure the two types of network architecture An I O network where the
215. ort allows a Processor Adapter to connect to an Ethernet network for high speed I O servicing high speed data transfer programming worldwide connectivity via the Internet interfaces with a wide array of standard Modbus over TCP IP Ethernet aware devices CAUTION AN Communication Errors May Result After taking an Ethernet Processor out of service it is recommended that you clear the program and IP address to prevent future conflicts Before installing a replacement Ethernet Processor on your network verify that it contains the correct IP address and program for your application Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Connector Type The Ethernet connector is a female RJ45 style phone jack Illustration The following illustration shows the position of the Ethernet port on a Processor Adapter 870 USE 101 10 V 2 143 Using the Ethernet Port Network Design Considerations Introduction In a distributed control environment Ethernet can be used as an O network a supervisory network a network that combines I O and supervisory functions This section discusses how to design your network to make communication between related devices as effective and deterministic as possible Note Preserve your ARP cache information When installed on a new network the M1 Ethernet Processor will obtain the MAC and IP addresses of other devices on
216. output IOBUS 0532 Five word analog input IOBUS 0533 Five word analog bidirectional IOBUS 0633 Eight word analog bidirectional IOBUS 1233 16 word analog bidirectional 870 USE 101 10 V 2 367 I O Mapping an l OBus Network with Concept 368 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer 1 4 Cop At a Glance Purpose Communication transactions over Modbus Plus are defined in Concept 2 1 by a configuration tool called Peer Cop This section uses examples to explain how to use Peer Cop to configure the two types of network architecture An I O network where the Peer Cop of the CPU defines all the communication transactions over the full network A supervisory network with two or more CPUs communicating with each other and with additional devices on the network CF Note The 171 CCC 960 30 and 171 CCC 980 30 require Concept 2 2 with service release 2 In This Chapter This chapter contains the following sections For This Topic See Section On Page Getting Started 1 370 Using Modbus Plus to Handle I O 2 376 Passing Supervisory Data over Modbus Plus 3 387 870 USE 101 10 V 2 369 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Section 14 1 Getting Started Overview Purpose This section explains how to access the Peer Cop Configuration Extension screen and describes the default screen In This Sect
217. provides the patterns that the MB ACT indicator will flash to indicate the Patterns status of the Modbus Plus node Pattern Meaning 6 flashes s This is the normal operating state for the node It is receiving and passing the network token All nodes ona healthy network flash this pattern 1 flash s The node is offline just after power up or after exiting the 6 flashes s mode In this state the node monitors the network and builds a table of active nodes After being in this state for 5s the node attempts to go to its normal operating state indicated by 6 flashes s 2 flashes then OFF for 2s The node detects the token being passed among the other nodes but never receives the token Check the network for an open circuit or defective termination 3 flashes then OFF for 1 7s The node is not detecting any tokens being passed among the other nodes It periodically claims the token but cannot find another node to which to pass it Check the network for an open circuit or defective termination 4 flashes then OFF for 1 4s The node has detected a valid message from a node using a network address identical to its own address The node remains in this state for as long as it continues to detect the duplicate address If the duplicate address is not detected for 5s the node changes to its 1flash s mode ON Indicates an invalid node address OFF Possible fault with Modbus Plus Option Adapte
218. r Continued on next page 82 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Option Adapters Front Panel Components Continued Modbus Plus The two rotary switches on the Option Adapter are used to set a Modbus Plus node Address address for the CPU module The switches are shown in the following illustration Switches Their usage is described in detail in Modbus Plus Addresses on page 198 The switches in this illustration are set to address 14 X10 x1 Modbus Plus This Option Adapter has two Modbus Plus ports Redundant cabling on the Ports A and B Modbus Plus network offers increased protection against cable faults or excessive noise bursts on either one of the two cable paths When one of the channels experiences communication problems error free messaging can continue to be processed on the alternate path 870 USE 101 10 V 2 83 Option Adapters Specifications Specifications This section provides the specifications for the 172 PNN 260 22 Momentum Serial Option Adapter Mechanical Weight 85 05 g 3 oz Dimensions HxDxW 58 3 on battery side x 60 6 x 143 1mm 2 27 x 2 36 x 5 57 in Material Enclosures bezels Lexan Time of Day Clock Accuracy 13 s day Batteries Type AAA alkaline two required Two included with Option Adapter in separate package Service life lt 30 days from the time a battery low indication is received to actual battery failure
219. r moves to the Delay column 870 USE 101 10 V 2 239 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Delay Overview The default value for the delay parameter is 10 ms This value is appropriate for most Momentum applications However if you use baud rates lower than 4800 you should adjust the delay timing Delay Timing If you use baud rates lower than 4800 adjust the delay timing as indicated in the following table Baud Rate Delay in Msec 2400 20 1200 30 600 50 300 100 Valid Delay The delay must always be a value between 10 and 200 ms expressed in 10 ms Values increments Procedure From the Port editor screen perform the steps in the following table to change the Delay parameter Step Action 1 Place the cursor on the current Delay entry for the Modbus port 2 Type a new value in the range 10 200 ms using 10 ms increments Push lt Enter gt Result The Port editor screen is updated with the Delay you have specified 240 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Protocol on Modbus Port 2 Overview Procedure If your Momentum M1 CPU is using the Modbus Port 2 provided by the 172 JNN 210 32 Option Adapter you can specify whether it will use the RS232 or RS485 protocol The factory set default for Modbus Port 2 is RS232 If you are using the Modbus Port 2 provided on the 171 CCS 780 00 or 171 CC
220. rds into a block of registers or a block of contiguous discrete references This section describes the STAT instruction We recommend that you do not use discretes in the STAT destination node because of the excessive number required to contain status information The copy to the STAT block always begins with the first word in the table up to the last word of interest to you For example if the status table is 20 words long and you are interested only in the statistics provided in word 11 you need to copy only words 1 11 by specifying a length of 11 in the STAT instruction The STAT block includes a top node for destination and a bottom node for length The STAT block is represented in the following illustration ON copies specified number of at ON operation successful words from the status table destination STAT length Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 411 Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions A Special STAT Instruction Continued Top Node The reference number entered in the top node is the first position in the destination Content block i e the block where the current words of interest from the status table will be copied The reference may be The first Ox reference in a block of contiguous discrete outputs The first 4x reference in a block of contiguous holding registers Bottom Node The integer value entered in the bottom node specifies the number of registe
221. rds to the minimum 4 in order to increase the Available Logic Area Default 144 words Minimum 4 words Continued on next page 322 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Changing the Size of the I O Map Continued From the PLC Configuration screen follow the steps below to change the size of Procedure the I O Map Step Action 1 From the Configure menu select I O Map Result The I O Map dialog box appears 170 Map Insert Delete 2 Modify the size of the I O Map by typing a new value in the Expansion Size field OR by adjusting the sliding scale 3 Click the lt OK gt button 323 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Establishing Configuration Extension Memory for Peer Cop Introduction By default the Peer Cop capability is disabled If you want to use Peer Cop to handle Modbus Plus communications you need to enable this capability and adjust the amount of configuration extension memory How Much The minimum Peer Cop memory requirement is 20 words the maximum is 1366 Memory words Follow these guidelines for estimating the amount of extension memory you will need for your Peer Cop database For Add Up to a maximum of Overhead 9 words a4 Global output 5 words Global input number of words 1088 words number of devices x 1 2 x number of device subentries Specific output 2
222. rength RS232 is non isolated from logic common Agency Approvals e UL508 CSA CUL CE e FM classi div2 34 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCS 760 00 Overview This section describes the 171 CCS 760 00 Processor Adapter including key features an illustration and specifications Key Features The key features of this Processor Adapter are Modbus Port 1 1 OBus port 256K bytes of internal memory 20 MHz clock speed cr Note The Modbus port connector looks like a Ethernet port connector Do not attempt to use an Modbus adapter as an Ethernet unit Do not attempt to place an Ethernet connector in a Modbus connector Illustration The connectors and LED indicators are shown in the following illustration 4 NN WIAA N ASS eBBaBauss s me l S T E Y TA VENNS j wer hneider as Ne aie Bdaisremation Ine mosod 174 CCS 76000 on sser O amp b pROCESSOR AD AS gt t feses opus ok al C l r Label Description 1 Modbus Port 1 connector OBus port connector LED indicators Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 35 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCS 760 00 Continued LED Indicators This Processor Adapter has two LED indicators RUN and COM ACT Their functions are described in the table below LED Status Function S
223. result in an unwanted change to another device and cause unexpected results Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Specifying Addresses Stopping the Processor Instead of a BOOTP server Schneider Electric s BOOTP Lite utility software can be used to provide the IP address subnet mask and default gateway to the processor A response from BOOTP Lite will cause the processor to enter Stopped mode on completion of power up if the processor has been set to Specify IP Address mode via Concept This is useful when inappropriate outbound network traffic might result if the processor immediately transitioned into Run mode after power up Refer to the BOOTP Lite user documentation for instructions Note BOOTP Lite and the user document are available for download at www modicon com 870 USE 101 10 V 2 152 Using the Ethernet Port Reading Ethernet Network Statistics Overview Ethernet Network statistics are stored in the processor adapter and can be viewed by the user Procedure The M1 ethernet Processor Adapter s Ethernet Network Statistics can be viewed using the Network Options Ethernet Tester This software utility is available with the Quantum 140 NOE 771 00 10 100 Megabit Ethernet Module User Guide 840 USE 116 00 Table of Network statistics occupy word 4 through word 35 in the Modbus Status Table as Statistics follows Table 1 TCP IP Ethernet Statis
224. rs or Content 16 bit words in the destination block where the current status information will be written The length i e number of words in the status table will vary depending on whether or not I OBus I O is being supported Without I OBus the STAT instruction is 12 words long With I OBus the instruction is 20 words long 412 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Ladder Logic Elements and Instructions A Special STAT Instruction Continued Words 1 12 The first 12 words describe the CPU status and are detailed in the following table Word Description 1 Displays the following aspects of the PLC s status If the bit is set to 1 then the condition is TRUE i felis lalsle z slo 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Battery Failed Always 1 Run Light OFF AC Power ON 1 16 Bit User Logic 0 24 Bit User Logic Single Sweep Delay Enabled Constant Sweep Enabled Reserved for internal use Displays more aspects of the controller status If the bit is set to 1 then the condition is TRUE l2la lalslelz leo 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Exiting DIM AWARENESS Single Sweeps Constant Sweep Times Exceeded Start Command Pending First Scan Not used Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 413 Ladder Logi
225. rview Purpose In This Section This section describes the 172 JNN 210 32 Serial Option Adapter including the front panel components and specifications This section includes the following topics For This Topic See Page Front Panel Components 68 Specifications 71 870 USE 101 10 V 2 67 Option Adapters Front Panel Components Overview The front panel includes An LED indicator Battery compartment Modbus Port 2 connector Illustration The illustration below shows the location of LED indicator the battery compartment and the Modbus Port 2 connector Label Description 1 LED indicator 2 Battery compartment door 3 Modbus Port 2 connector Continued on next page 68 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Option Adapters Front Panel Components Continued LED Indicator Modbus Port 2 cr Auto Logout Feature On Modbus Port 2 This Option Adapter has one LED indicator the Com Act indicator Its functions are described in the table below LED Status Function COM ACT Green May be on steadily or blinking Indicates activity on the RS232 RS485 serial port Off No activity on the RS232 RS485 serial port Modbus Port 2 is a general purpose asynchronous serial port with user selectable RS232 RS485 slave functionality The choice between RS232 and RS485 is made in the software Note When this Option
226. ry set default is EVEN parity Procedure To change the parity parameter perform the steps in the following table Step Action 1 Place the cursor on the current Parity entry for the Modbus port you want to enter Push lt Enters gt Result A popup window appears in the top left corner of the screen displaying your three Parity options Default Bridge F3 _F 4 _F 5 F 6F 7 Leu 8 F8 OFF F9 PORTS Bridge Mode N Data Parity Stop Baud Head Slot Address Delay Protocol Bits Bits 9600 9 1 10 ms 9600 9 1 10 ms RS232 Use an arrow key to toggle the cursor onto the desired Parity selection in the popup window then push lt Enter gt Result The Port editor screen is updated with the Parity type you have specified and the cursor moves to the Stop Bits column 870 USE 101 10 V 2 237 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Baud Rate Overview CF Procedure Each port can be configured for a baud in the range 50 19 200 Sixteen valid bauds are user selectable The factory set default is 9600 baud Note If you use a baud rate lower than 4800 you should adjust the default delay parameter See Changing the Delay on page 240 To change the baud parameter perform the steps in the following table Step Action 1 Place the cursor on the current Baud entry for the Modbus port you want to enter P
227. s Enclosures and bezels are made of Lexan a polycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA RFI Susceptibility immunity Meets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of protection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric strength RS232 is non isolated from logic common Agency Approvals e UL508 CSA CUL CE e FMclass1 div2 870 USE 101 10 V 2 31 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCS 700 10 Overview This section describes the 171 CCS 700 10 Processor Adapter including key features an illustration and specifications Key Features The key features of this Processor Adapter are Modbus Port 1 64K bytes of internal memory 32 MHz clock speed EF Note The Modbus port connector looks like a Ethernet port connector Do not attempt to use an Modbus adapter as an Ethernet unit Do not attempt to place an Ethernet conn
228. s 71 172 PNN 210 22 Modbus Plus Option Adapter diagram 74 LED indicator 75 Modbus Plus address switches 76 specifications 77 172 PNN 260 22 Redundant Modbus Plus Option Adapter diagram 80 LED indicators 81 Modbus Plus address switches 83 ports 83 specifications 84 A Assembly Processor Adapter and I O base 89 Processor Adapter and Option Adapter 870 USE 101 10 V 2 421 Index 95 Processor Adapter Option Adapter and I O base 98 C communication ports configuring with Concept 336 configuring with Modsoft 232 delay parameter 240 341 stop bit 234 340 CPU Configuration Page 166 links 166 E Ethernet tester Requirements 158 l OBus network accessing an I O map screen 250 editing an I O map 252 365 supporting an I O map 248 249 362 OBus port 23 172 InterBus module identifier codes 255 366 L Ladder logic 405 local I O I O mapping with Concept 357 I O mapping with Modsoft 242 M1E I O Status Page 165 167 links 167 Modbus Plus addresses 198 cluster mode 182 cabling schemes 187 network types 183 new features for Momentum 182 Peer Cop 200 standard cabling schemes 185 Modbus Plus network architecture address strategy 264 282 377 388 two types 257 369 Modbus Plus port 181 cable accessories 191 pinouts and wiring diagrams 194 Modbus Port 1 22 113 auto logout feature 115 cable accessories 116 connector type 113 diagram 113 para
229. s binary or changing it to BCD tilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode Quit F 1 _F2 _F3 __F 4 _F5 F6 F Lev 8 F8 OFF F PEER COP 246 ms Total Links Link Id 1 HOLD USED 13 OF 1366 WORDS Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT 300016 300016 1 i SPECIFIC OUTPUT E GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES GLOBAL OUTPUT Timeout On Error ON LINK Continued on next page 274 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Specifying References for Input Data Continued Procedure Continued Next Step Step Action In this case we will leave the default BIN setting Push lt Enter gt Result The Peer Cop screen is now set to handle a 16 point input module at Modbus Plus address 2 The screen should like this Go loNode AddNode lineout oniran De lNode Timeout 246 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error HOLD USED 13 OF 1366 WORDS Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT 300016 300016 1 BIN SPECIFIC OUTPUT ME GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT ca Accessing the remaining devices 870 USE 101 10 V 2 275 Using Peer Cop with Modsof
230. s 129 Connectors for Modbus RS485 Networks cccceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeee 132 Terminating Devices for Modbus RS485 Networks csceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 134 Pinouts for Modbus RS485 Networks cccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeneesaas 135 Using the Ethernet Port s ssssseeeesesseseeeeeeeseeeensssnneeees 141 Ethernet Pott scceeee ate dia en ee ee E 142 Ethernet POr togri ieee eenean arot eee ade I a aE manta SEALE rE 143 Network Design Considerations ccecccceceeeseeeseeeeaeeseeeseeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeeaeeseneee 144 SOCUIILY EEPE A E ATTAT 146 Cabling Schemes sie a ncn aan a aaa eaaa dite cet Bates tia des oat 147 PINQUIS ate cc2 sce cee A banidlseceatass dee deata ss S hectic ogncs EA AE E 148 Assigning Ethernet Address Parameters cessceeeseeeeesneeeeenneeseneeeereneeeee 149 Using BOOTP Lite to Assign Address Parameters ccccscccsssseeeesteeeeteees 152 Reading Ethernet Network Statistics 0 ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeneete 153 Descrip M i Ate eal ee el el A ee 154 Establishing a Connection with an Ethernet Module cccsceeeeeeeees 158 Establishing a Connection with an Ethernet Module cecceseeeeeeeeees 159 Accessing Embedded Web Pages ceescceeereeeesneeeeeneeseneeeteneeeeenneeeseneees 162 Accessing the Web Utility Home Page oe eeeseeeeseetesneeeeenneeteneeeeeneeeee 163 171 CCC 960 30 AND 171 CCC 980 30 Web Pa
231. s Topic See Page 171 CCS 700 00 29 171 CCS 700 10 32 171 CCS 760 00 35 171 CCC 760 10 38 171 CCS 780 00 41 171 CCC 780 10 44 171 CCC 960 20 47 171 CCC 960 30 51 171 CCC 980 20 56 171 CCC 980 30 60 28 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCS 700 00 Overview This section describes the 171 CCS 700 00 Processor Adapter including key features an illustration and specifications Key Features The key features of this Processor Adapter are Modbus Port 1 64K bytes of internal memory 20 MHz clock speed t Note The Modbus port connector looks like a Ethernet port connector Do not attempt to use an Modbus adapter as an Ethernet unit Do not attempt to place an Ethernet connector in a Modbus connector Illustration The connector and LED indicators are shown in the following illustration QaRwWBBWWVswss annunnni h SSS AE TNL hk m CPU Sicceteber Com pt a schneider ic 71 ccs 700 ik TO A oe pal e thee ADAPTER HK Ee RSN aoea sN 310745100374 vase nUSA i 5 Rev 0103 rss Label Description 1 Modbus Port 1 connector 2 LED indicators Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 29 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCS 700 00 Continued LED Indicators This Processor Adapter has two LED indicators RUN and COM ACT Their functions are described in the table below
232. s available Off No valid MAC address Specifications The following table contains specifications for the 171 CCC 960 20 Momentum M1 Processor Adapter Memory Internal Memory 544K bytes User Memory 18K words Flash RAM 512K bytes Clock Speed 50 MHz Continued on next page 48 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 960 20 Continued Specifications Continued Input and Output References Registers 26048 Discretes 8192 Ox references 8192 1x references I O Servicing Local I O Services all the points on any host Momentum I O base Watchdog timeout 335 ms Logic solve time See formula following Mechanical Weight 42 5 g 1 5 02 Dimensions HxDxW 25 9x61 02x125mm 1 01 x 2 37 x 4 86 in Material Enclosures bezels Lexan Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interactions Enclosures and bezels are made of Lexan a polycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA RFI Susceptibility immunity Meets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipme
233. s displaying 16 baud values I Bridge Mode __ Baud Data bits Stop bits Parity Delay ms Address Mode Protocol 2 2000 81 Even 10 1 RTu_ Rs485 2 Click on the desired rate Result The Modbus Port Settings dialog box is updated with the Baud number you have specified 338 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Changing Mode and Data Bits Introduction From the Modbus Port Settings dialog box each port can be configured to operate in one of two possible modes RTU or ASCII Ifthe mode is RTU the number of data bits is always 8 If the mode is ASCII the number of data bits is always 7 CF Note The factory set default is 8 bit RTU Procedure To change the mode and data bit parameters perform the steps in the following table Step Action 1 Click on the down arrow under Mode Result A menu appears displaying your two Mode options Modbus Port Settings i I Bridge Mode __ Baud Data bits Stop bits Parity Delay ms Address Mode _ Protocol 14 9600 81 Even ime AS232 2 9600 81 Even gt RTU RS485 Cancel Help Click on the RTU or ASCII entry Result The Ports setting Window is updated with the Mode type you have specified the corresponding Data Bit value appears Example If you change Modbus Port 1 from RTU mode to ASCII mode the Data Bit value also automatically changes from 8
234. s normal Ethernet initialization at power up 3 flashes indicates no 10BASE T link pulse detected Check cable and hub 4 flashes indicates duplicate IP address detected 5 flashes indicates no IP address available Off No valid MAC address The following table contains specifications for the 171 CCC 980 20 Momentum M1 Processor Adapter Memory Internal Memory 544K bytes User Memory 18K words Flash RAM 512K bytes Clock Speed 50 MHz Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 57 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 980 20 Continued Specifications Continued Input and Output References Registers 26048 Discretes 8192 0x references 8192 1x references I O Servicing Local I O Services all the points on any host Momentum I O base Watchdog timeout 335 ms Logic solve time See formula following Mechanical Weight 42 5 g 1 5 oz Dimensions HxDxW 25 9x61 02x125mm 1 01 x 2 37 x 4 86 in Material Enclosures bezels Lexan Operating Conditions Temperature 0 60 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Chemical interactions Enclosures and bezels are made of Lexan a polycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude
235. s of safety and to assure compliance with documented system data repairs to components should be performed only by the manufacturer Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage MODSOFT is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric Inc The following are trademarks of Schneider Electric Inc Modbus Modbus Plus Concept Modicon 984 DIGITAL and DEC are registered trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation IBM and IBM AT are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Microsoft and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Copyright 2000 Schneider Electric Inc Printed in U S A 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Preface vi 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Contents Part Chapter 1 Section 1 1 Section 1 2 About This Book iiien anean nanaman a aaiae ra inean aa 15 Revision FISTORY inaning a edt tes le paia daadaa an 15 DOCUMENT SCOPE innensi inno ei a ate 16 Validity N t ateren anen areas a eo aea aae eee baeaote LS 16 Related Documentation 00 eee eeeneeeeenneeeeneeeeeeneeeeeaaeeeenneeeteaaeeeseetereeneeereaeees 16 USER GOMMENTS a a aa a aaa r a aE a chicsascacnshesticesareepageeeceanitageeadiecuad 16 Getting Started iaiaeiaeiaa dana dabaea ieu eres 17 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 19 Introducing the M1 Processor Adapters eesceeeseeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeneeeteneeeeeees 20 OVOWIOW
236. s on the network Specific Input Data received by a specific 32 words device device from a specific device 500 words from all specific devices Peer Cop uses defined data references like PLC discretes or registers as sources and destinations For example a block of registers can constitute the data source for the transmitting device and that same or another block of registers can be the data destination for the receiving device Continued on next page 200 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Plus Ports Peer Cop Continued How Peer Cop Data Is Sent and Received Effect of Using Peer Cop The reception of Peer Cop source data and the delivery of Peer Cop destination data are handled by the token rotation The token is always passed to the next logical device in the network s address sequence Because all the Modbus Plus devices monitor the network any one device can extract the data addressed specifically to it Likewise all devices can extract global data Peer Cop then enables the Modbus Plus device currently holding the token to direct specific data to individual devices and broadcast global data to all devices on the network as part of its token frame The net effect of using Peer Cop for data transactions is that each sending device can specify unique references as data sources and each receiving device can specify the same or different references as data destinations When devi
237. s the area in memory where all the input and output references for program and control operations are defined and returned The user may change the way internal memory is allocated by adjusting parameters for user memory and state RAM Flash RAM contains the executive firmware which is the operating system for the PLC It also contains a firmware kernel which cannot be changed The kernel is a small portion of memory that recognizes acceptable executive firmware packages and allows them to be downloaded to the Processor Adapter Space is also provided in Flash so that a copy of the user program and state RAM values can be stored This back up capability is particularly useful in configurations where no battery is used i e a Processor Adapter without an Option Adapter When the module is successfully communicating with other devices if a ring adapter with battery back up is not present it is recommended that you stop the processor and save the user program to Flash This will save the processor s ARP cache and enable it to remember this information if power is lost or removed This procedure should also be followed whenever Anew or substitute device is installed on the network The IP address of a network device has been changed Note Some processors run both IEC and Ladder Logic and some run only IEC See table following Continued on next page 24 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor A
238. send eight 16 bit words to the supervisory PLC Push lt Enter gt Result The Peer Cop screen should like this Utilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode a es ee PEER COP Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 13 OF 2880 WORDS Access to Node 1 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400016 400023 8 BIN GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Continued on next page 288 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Specifying References for Input and Output Data Continued Defining the Global Inputs Now the M1 needs to be Peer Copped to receive five words of global data from the supervisory PLC at Modbus Plus address 1 Follow the steps in the table below to specify the global input references Step Action 1 In the REFERENCE column on the first line of the GLOBAL INPUT field type the value 400001 the first register in which the CPU will store data Push lt Enter gt Result The cursor moves into the LEN column of the GLOBAL INPUT field GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode F1 _ F2 _F3 ___F 4 ___ 5 _ _F6 F L PEER COP Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 13 OF 2666 WORDS Access to Node 1 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400016 400023
239. set as follows Utilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode Fi F2 __F3 ___F 4 __F5 _ F6 _F L PEER COP Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 1 OF 1366 WORDS Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Confirming the Peer Cop summary information 870 USE 101 10 V 2 267 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Confirming the Peer Cop Summary Information Overview Once you have defined the link and accessed a node the Peer Cop summary information values assume default settings This section describes those settings and how to confirm or change them Timeout The default Timeout is 500 ms Timeout is the maximum interval that Modbus Plus on a Peer Copped device will remain healthy without communication activity If this interval is exceeded the device will clear its network health bit and will no longer try to communicate via Modbus Plus The timeout interval must be in the range 20 2000ms and it must be specified as an increment of 20ms For our example we will change the timeout value to 240ms On Error The default On Error setting is CLEAR The On Error setting specifies how the Peer Copped device will treat the last values received b
240. soft Section 8 2 Configuring Option Adapter Features Overview Purpose This section describes how to implement the battery backup and time of day TOD clock features of the Momentum Option Adapters In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Reserving and Monitoring a Battery Coil 224 Setting up the Time of Day Clock 226 Setting the Time 228 Reading the Time of Day Clock 231 870 USE 101 10 V 2 223 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Reserving and Monitoring a Battery Coil Introduction Since the Option Adapter does not have an LED to indicate when the battery is low we recommend that you reserve a 0x reference to monitor the health of the battery This section describes how to reserve and monitor a battery coil using the Configuration Overview editor in Modsoft 2 6 Reserving a To reserve a battery coil perform the steps in the following table Battery Coil Step Action 1 From the Overview menu select Specials Result The cursor moves into the Battery Coil field on the Configuration Overview screen Loadable Cfg F 3 _F 4 _F 5_F 6 _F f Lev 8 F8 0FF F9 CONFIGURATION OUERUIEW Size of Full Logic Area 01198 No of I O Map Words 00512 PLC Type MOMNTUM Model M1 I 70 I O Type MOMENTUM System Memory 2 4K Number of Segments Extended Memory K I O Map Reserved Words Specials Ranges Batter
241. ss selected under the heading 1 64 Type 400001 in the Dest Ref column on the first line to indicate the first register Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 391 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Specifying References for Input and Output Data Continued Defining the Global Inputs Step Action Continued 3 Type the value 1 in the Index column indicating that the CPU will receive part of the global input data beginning with the first word 1 64 Range 400001 401872 1 32 1 32 h _Subfield_ Dest Ref Index Length Bin BCD 3 E 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 x Clear Subfields 4 Type the value 5 in the Length column indicating that the CPU will accept five words of the global input data Leave the default BIN setting 1 64 Range 400001 401872 1 32 1 32 i _ Subfield_ Dest Ref Index Length Bin BCD 3 io sain 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 x Clear Subfields 5 Click lt OK gt Next Step Defining the references for the next node 392 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Defining the References for the Next Node Overview We now want to attach the Concept 2 2 programming panel to the 171 CCS 760 00 Momentum M1 CPU at Modbus Plus address 3 and create a similar Peer Cop for this device to communicate with the supervisory PLC at Modbus Plus address 1 In this case we want the M1
242. st select the row by clicking on the row number at the far left Then click the Delete button Sort To sort the I O configuration list select a column by clicking on the column heading i e Read Ref Master Then click the Sort button Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 355 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Completing the I O Configuration Continued Fill Down To copy part of any row to the next row or to a series of adjoining rows use the Fill Down button following the steps in the table below Step Action 1 Use your mouse to select the data you would like to copy and the cells you would like to copy it to Note You must select one contiguous block of cells with the data to be copied in the first row You cannot select two separate blocks 2 Click the Fill Down button Result The data from the first row is copied to the selected cells below 356 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Section 12 5 I O Mapping the Local I O Points Accessing and Editing the I O Map Introduction Every M1 Processor Adapter is assembled on an I O base The I O points on the base are the local I O for that processor As part of the configuration process you need to create an I O Map for the local I O The I O Map assigns the appropriate range and type of reference values 0x 1x 3x or 4x from the CPU s state RAM to the input and or output points on the local base uni
243. t Accessing anl O To access an I O Map screen from the PLC Configuration screen select I O map Map Screen from the Configure menu Result The I O Map dialog box appears VO Map x Expansion Size 144 j SF Insert Delete Cancel Help Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 357 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Accessing and Editing the I O Map Continued Editing the Local From the I O Map dialog box perform the steps in the following table to edit the I O Map local I O Map Step Action 1 Click the Edit button at the end of the row Result The Local Momentum I O dialog box appears Local Momentum Drop x Drop Module Modules 0 Bits In 0 Bits Out 0 Bits In 0 Bits Out 0 Status Table Delete Params Clear Cut Copy Paste Module Detected InRef InEnd Out Ref Out End Description Cane te ren Click the button under Module and select your local I O base from the dropdown menu 1 0 Module Selection AAI 030 00 Continued on next page 358 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Accessing and Editing the I O Map Continued Editing the Local I O Map Step Action Continued 3 Double click on your selection or click the lt OK gt button Result The I O base you selected is displayed in the Local Momentum Drop dialog box Complete any required fi
244. t Accessing the Remaining Devices Introduction The I O modules at Modbus Plus addresses 3 5 can be configured individually in a manner similar to that used for the 170 ADI 340 00 module at address 2 Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to access a new device address in this case address 3 using the AddNode command Step Action 1 Push lt Tab gt to move the cursor to the menu at the top of the Peer Cop screen 2 Using a left or right arrow key as necessary move the cursor onto the AddNode command Push lt Enters gt Result The Add Node popup appears over the Peer Cop screen with the cursor flashing in the Link value field ilit Quit Ut Fi GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode 3 4 5 6 F L Timeout 246 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error HOLD USED 13 OF 1366 WORDS Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT 300016 300016 1 BIN SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT fidd Node GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Link Node Make sure that the Link value in the Add Node popup is 1 Push lt Enter gt Result The Link value is set to 1 and the cursor moves to the Node value field of the Add Node popup Continued on next page 276 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Accessing t
245. t The Link value is set to 1 and the cursor moves to the Node value field of the Add Node popup Utilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError Quit 1 F3 F4 F5 F6 PEER COP Timeout ms Total Links Link Id On Error USED 1 OF WORDS Access to Node MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT dd Node GLOBAL INPUT Link 1 GLOBAL INPUT Node Ho TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT Continued on next page 284 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Configuring a Node to Exchange Data Continued Procedure Continued Next Step Step Action If the value in the Node field is 1 as in our example press lt Enter gt Otherwise enter the value 1 in the Node field to indicate that you will access the CPU at address 1 Then press lt Enters gt Result The Add Node popup disappears and the Peer Cop summary information values are set as follows SoloNode AddNode lineout oniran De 1Node Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 1 OF 1366 WORDS Access to Node 1 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT EE SPECIFIC OUTPUT i GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT u Confirming the Peer Cop summary information 870 USE
246. t Value setting is Clear on timeout This setting specifies how a peer copped device will treat the last values received before a timeout once Modbus Plus communications have been restored Option Effect Clear on timeout Sets all values received before timeout to 0 Hold on timeout Retains the values received before timeout 870 USE 101 10 V 2 375 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Section 14 2 Using Modbus Plus to Handle I O Overview Purpose This section uses an example to explain how to configure a Modbus Plus network for I O servicing In this example a CPU will control four Momentum I O modules In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Devices on the Network 377 Changing the Peer Cop Summary Information 378 Specifying References for Input Data 380 Specifying References for Output Data 384 376 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Devices on the Network Introduction This section describes the five devices which comprise the sample network and the strategy used to assign addresses The Network The following table lists the Modbus Plus address and components of each Devices Momentum module on the network Modbus Plus 1 0 Base Type Adapter Type Address 1 type not specified M1 Processor Adapter type not specified
247. t attempt to place a Modbus connector in an Ethernet connector Illustration The connectors and LED indicators are shown in the following illustration a ea Si dsuessse aeeeeses o a pe asaan al oC le A m Gee E adn mS gt A parmesan e BOER mals ELES Label Description 1 Ethernet port connector 2 OBus port connector LED indicators Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 47 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 960 20 Continued LED Indicators This Processor Adapter has three LED indicators RUN LAN ACT IVE and LAN ST ATUS Their functions are described in the table below LED Indicato Status r Pattern Start up Both Single flash Indicates good health RUN Green On continuously when the CPU has received power and is solving logic Flashes an error pattern if the CPU is in kernel mode See Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes on page 417 Off CPU is not powered up or is not solving logic LAN ACT Green May be on continuously or blinking Indicates activity on Ethernet port Off No activity on Ethernet port LAN ST Green On continuously during normal operation Fast blink indicates normal Ethernet initialization at power up 3 flashes indicates no 10BASE T link pulse detected Check cable and hub 4 flashes indicates duplicate IP address detected 5 flashes indicates no IP addres
248. t enables them to control and communicate with network slave I O If you are using I OBus to control network I O you need to write an I O Map in your configuration This section describes the configuration parameters required to support an I O Map for I OBus By default 512 words are reserved for I O Mapping This may or may not be the appropriate memory allocation to support your I OBus network A rule of thumb for roughly estimating the number of words required for I O Mapping is 16 words for overhead 10 words module on the network including both the local and the network I O The idea behind adjusting the memory size is to allow you to completely I O Map your network while preserving as much user memory as possible for your application program Required Be sure that the following parameters are set on the Configuration Overview Settings screen Parameter Setting Processor type e 12 0 fora171 CCS 760 00 Processor Adapter e 18 0 fora 171 CCC 760 10 Processor Adapter Number of segments 2 I O Map reserved words Enough to support your I O map Continued on next page 248 870 USE 101 10 V 2 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Modsoft Supporting an I O Map for an I OBus Network Continued Next Step Once you are sure that your Configuration Overview parameters are set properly you can access a second I O Map screen for the I OBus network 870 USE 101 10 V 2 249 I O Mapping an I
249. tart up Both Single flash Indicates good health RUN Green On continuously when the CPU has received power and is solving logic Flashes an error pattern if the CPU is in kernel mode See Run LED Flash Patterns and Error Codes on page 417 Off CPU is not powered up or is not solving logic COM ACT Green May be on continuously or blinking Indicates activity on Modbus port 1 Off No activity on Modbus port 1 Specifications The following table contains specifications for the 171 CCS 760 00 Momentum M1 Processor Adapter Memory Internal Memory 256K bytes User Memory 12K words 984LL Exec 160K words IEC Exec Flash RAM 256K bytes Clock Speed 20 MHz 984LL Input and Output References Registers 4096 Discretes 2048 any combination of 0x and 1x references 984LL IEC Input and Output References Registers 4096 Discretes 2048 any combination of 0x and 1x references Continued on next page 36 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCS 760 00 Continued Specifications Continued I O Servicing Local I O Services all the points on any host Momentum I O base Watchdog timeout 419 ms Logic solve time 0 25 ms k ladder logic instructions Mechanical Weight 42 5 g 1 5 oz Dimensions HxDxW 25 9x61 02x125mm 1 01 x 2 37 x 4 86 in Material Enclosures bezels Lexan Op
250. tection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric strength RS232 485 is non isolated from logic common Agency Approvals e UL508 CSA CUL CE e FMclass1 div2 pending 72 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Option Adapters Section 2 3 Modbus Plus Option Adapter Overview Purpose This section describes the 172 PNN 210 22 Modbus Plus Option Adapter including the front panel components and specifications In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Front Panel Components 74 Specifications 77 870 USE 101 10 V 2 73 Option Adapters Front Panel Components Overview The front panel includes An LED indicator Battery compartment e Address switches 9 pin D shell connector for Modbus Plus communications Illustration The illustration below shows the LED indicator address switches Modbus Plus connector and battery compartment Label Description 1 LED indicator 2 Battery compartment door 3 Address switches for Modbus Plus 4 9 pin D shell connector for Modbus Plus communications port A Continued on next page 74 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Option Adapters Front Panel Components Continued LED Indicator This Option Adapter has one LED indicator the MB ACT indicator This indicator flashes the following patterns based on the status of the Modbus P
251. tep Action 4 Now select On Error from the menu bar Result The cursor moves into the On Error field in the Peer Cop summary information region and a popup menu appears with two choices listed CLEAR and HOLD GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode Fi F2 _ __F3 _ __F 4 _F5 F6 _ F Lev 8 F8 OFF F PEER COP 246 ms Total Links Link Id 1 CLEAR ED 1 OF 1366 Access 2 LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT 5 Move the cursor onto HOLD and push lt Enter gt Result The On Error value in the Peer Cop summary information region is set to HOLD Your Peer Cop screen should now look like this GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode Quit Lev 8 F8 OFF F PEER COP Timeout 246 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error HOLD USED 1 OF 1366 WORDS Access to Node 2 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT EE SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT S Continued on next page 270 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Confirming the Peer Cop Summary Information Continued Next Step Specifying references for input data 870 USE
252. teps in the table below to change the delay Step Action 1 Click on the Delay parameter for the port 2 Type a new value in the range 10 1000 ms using increments of 10 ms 870 USE 101 10 V 2 341 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Changing the Modbus Address Overview Each port can be assigned a Modbus network address in the range 1 247 That address must be unique with respect to all other device addresses on the same Modbus networks Since Modbus port 1 and Modbus port 2 are always on different Modbus networks they can both be assigned the same address value without conflict The factory set default for both ports is address 1 Procedure From the Modbus Port Settings dialog box perform the steps in the following table to change the Modbus Address Step Address 1 Click on the Address field for the appropriate Modbus port 2 Type a new value in the range 1 247 Set the Stop Bit at 1 Bridge mode is not supported 342 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Changing the Protocol on Modbus Port 2 Overview If your Momentum M1 CPU is using the Modbus Port 2 provided by the 172 JNN 210 32 Option Adapter you can specify whether it will use the RS232 or RS485 protocol The factory set default for Modbus Port 2 is RS485 Procedure From the Modbus Port Settings dialog box perform the steps in the following table to change the Protocol on
253. tes 171 CCS 70000 2048 2048 171 CCS 70010 2048 2048 171 CCS 760 00 4096 2048 4096 2048 0x references 2048 1x references 171 CCC 76010 26048 8192 Ox references 26048 8192 0x references 8192 1x references 8192 1x references 171 CCS 780 00 2048 2048 171 CCC 78010 26048 8192 0x references 26048 8192 0x references 8192 1x references 8192 1x references 171 CCC 960 20 26048 8192 Ox references 8192 1x references 171 CCC 960 30 26048 8192 0x references 11 200 4096 0x references 8192 1x references 4096 1x references 171 CCC 980 20 26048 8192 Ox references 8192 1x references 171 CCC 980 30 26048 8192 0x references 11 200 4096 0x references 4096 1x references This total may include any combination of 0x and 1x references 26 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters Power Supply Supplied by A Processor Adapter requires 5 V which is supplied by its I O base Base CF Note For information about the 171 CPS 111 00 TIO Power Supply Module refer to 870 Use 002 00 V 2 Momentum I O Base User Guide 870 USE 101 10 V 2 27 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters Section 1 2 Features of Each Processor Adapter Overview Purpose In This Section This section provides a photograph description of key features and LEDs and specifications for each Processor Adapter This section contains the following topics For Thi
254. th Concept Configuring I O Continued Read and Write You may include read and write commands on the same line as shown Ethernet I O Scanner Description You can type a brief description up to 32 characters of the transaction in the Description column 870 USE 101 10 V 2 353 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Completing the I O Configuration Introduction This section describes how to complete your Ethernet I O configuration using the Copy Cut Paste Delete Sort and Fill Down buttons Copy and Paste To save time when typing similar read and write commands you may copy and paste entire rows within your configuration Follow the steps in the table below Step Action 1 Select the row you want to copy by clicking on the row number at the far left Click the Copy button above the I O configuration list Select the row where you would like to paste the data by clicking on the row number at the far left Click the Paste button above the I O configuration list Continued on next page 354 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Completing the I O Configuration Continued Cut and Paste To move a row within the configuration list follow the directions for copying only use the Cut button instead of the Copy button Delete To delete a row from the configuration li
255. the Strategy supervisory computer When the network initializes the supervisor will be the first device to get the token and the token rotation table will be built with respect to the supervising device 388 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Specifying References for Input and Output Data Overview We will now set up the 171 CCS 760 00 Momentum M1 CPU at Modbus Plus address 2 to send eight 4x registers of specific output to the supervisory computer at Modbus Plus address 1 receive five 4x registers of global input data from the ATRIUM supervisor These registers are the first five registers in a 10 register block of global outputs broadcast by the supervisory controller Er Note For this example we will use the default values for Health Timeout 500 ms and Last Value Clear on timeout Defining the The following table describes how to define the specific output starting from the Specific Output Peer Cop dialog box Step Action 1 Click on the Specific Output button Result The Specific Output dialog box appears Specific Output ix Range aS Bee eral e a aa vis a i io er al a Cancel Hep Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 389 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Specifying References for Input and Output Data Continued Defining the Specific Output C
256. then push lt Enter gt Result A new I O Map screen appears labeled Type IOBUS You are now ready to start I O Mapping the I OBus network 9 es MOMENTUM Type IOBUS Drop 1 Available 233 Used 10 Point 6 of 2648 PAGE NODE Module Input Ref Output Ref Description M 1 1 i i i i 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 Next Step Editing the I OBus I O Map 870 USE 101 10 V 2 251 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Modsoft Editing the l OBus I O Map Overview Procedure The maximum number of modules which can be I O Mapped on the I OBus network depends on your Processor Adapter Processor Adapter Max Modules Max I O Bits 171 CCS 760 00 128 2048 171 CCC 760 10 256 4096 171 CCC 960 20 128 2049 171 CCC 960 30 256 4096 You may use up to 16 IOBUS screens to map your I OBus network Each page allows you to enter up to 16 I O base and or InterBus I O modules The first column on the screen tells you which page you are on To enter I O bases or Interbus I O modules in the I OBus I O Map perform the steps in the following table Step Action 1 Place the cursor in the Module column in row 1 for NODE 01 and push the lt F8 gt key OR lt Shift gt lt gt Result A list of I O names appears as shown below This list includes model numbers for the available Momentum I O bases and Terminal Block I O modules It also includes a series of InterBus Module Identifier co
257. this module We will assign a 3x register 300016 as a specific input to the CPU When the 170 ADI 340 00 sends input data to the CPU it will be sent to this register Continued on next page 380 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Specifying References for Input Data Continued Procedure Follow the steps in the table below to define the specific input starting from the Peer Cop dialog box Step Action 1 Click on the Specific Input button Result The Specific Input dialog box appears Specific Input x Range Source Dest Ref Length Bin BCD a ay la aa ar as ae 8 ae eee 10 Saal Sa Cancel Help Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 381 Configuring a Modbus Plus Network in Concept with Peer Cop Specifying References for Input Data Continued Procedure Continued Step Action 2 Since you are addressing the device at address 2 you will use the line for Source 2 Type the value 300016 on that line in the Dest Ref column Specific Input ix Range 300001 300048 1 33 _ Source Dest Ref Length Bin BCD E 3 Type the value 1 in the Length column indicating that the device at address 2 will exchange one word of data In this case we will leave the default BIN setting Specific Input x Range 300001 300048 1 33 Conti
258. tics Table Word Data 00 02 MAC Address 03 Board Status 04 05 Rx Interrupt 06 07 Tx Interrupt 08 09 NA 10 11 Total Collisions 12 13 Rx Missed Packet Errors 14 15 NA 16 17 Chip Restart Count Lo word Collison Peak Detector 18 19 Framing Errors Giant Frame Error 20 21 Overflow Errors 22 23 CRC Errors 24 25 Receive Buffer Errors Out of Server Paths 26 27 Transmit Buffer Errors 28 29 Silo Underflow TCP retries 30 31 Late Collision 32 33 Lost Carrier 34 35 16 Collision Tx Failure 36 37 IP Address 870 USE 101 10 V 2 153 Using the Ethernet Port Description Operational Statistics Words 4 5 Number of frames received by this station Only broadcast frames pertinent to this Receive station and individual address match frames are received and counted Interrupts Words 6 7 Number of frames transmitted from this station Includes all transmitted broadcast Transmit frames for ARP and BOOTP Interrupts Ethernet Network Functioning Errors Words 8 9 Not used Words 10 11 This field contains the total number of transmit collisions Total Collisions Words 12 13 Rx Receive frame was missed because no buffer space was available to store the Missed Packet frame Indicates firmware unable to keep up with link The only time this should Errors increment is during the save user logic to flash command when all int
259. tion Adapter from the M1 Disassembling processor an Option Adapter and M1 Step Action Processor 1 Use a screwdriver to push the clips on both sides of the adapter inward 2 Lift off the adapter 104 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Assembling Momentum Components Section 3 3 Installing Batteries in an Option Adapter Installation Guidelines Why Install If you are using a Momentum Option Adapter in your CPU assembly you have a Batteries battery backup capability The batteries will maintain user logic state RAM values and the time of day clock in the event that the CPU loses power What Kind of Two AAA alkaline batteries can be installed in the compartment on the side of the Batteries Option Adapter A set of batteries is supplied with the module not installed CAUTION A N ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY EXPOSED When the battery door is open electronic circuitry is exposed Follow proper ESD measures while handling the equipment during battery maintenance Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Installing When installing the batteries observe correct polarity as indicated on the Batteries compartment door Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 105 Assembling Momentum Components Installation Guidelines Continued Leave Power On When Changing Batteries Removing and Once your CPU has been commissioned and is running maintain po
260. tion ports Male 9 pin D shell Cable Female 9 pin D shell Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 177 Using the I OBus Port Cable Accessories Continued Interbus Cable OBus communicates over Interbus full duplex cable For custom cable lengths Connector Kit Modicon offers an Interbus cable connector kit part number 170 XTS 009 00 The kit includes two connectors one male and one female that can be soldered to an Interbus full duplex cable of the appropriate length The recommended cable is Belden 3120A or equivalent Belden 8103 is an acceptable alternative cr Note The connectors in the 170 XTS 009 00 Kit are high profile 178 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the I OBus Port Pinouts Interbus Cable The following illustration shows how to wire the connectors of the remote bus cable Outgoing Remote Bus pins Male Incoming Remote Bus sockets Female Pin Wire Color Outgoing Connection Pin Wire Color Ingoing Connection il Yellow DO 1 Yellow DO Data Out Data Out 2 Gray DI 2 Gray DI Data In Data In Brown Common Brown Common 4 GND GND Reference conductor Reference conductor fiber optic adapter fiber optic adapter 5 Vec 5 Vec Power supply for fiber Power supply for fiber optic adapter optic adapter 6 Green DO_N 6 Green DO_N Data Out Negated Data Out Negated 7 Pink DI_N 7 Pink
261. to the supervisory computer at Modbus Plus address 1 receive five 4x registers of global input from the supervisory computer These registers are the first five registers in a 10 register block broadcast by the supervisor Defining the The following table describes how to define the specific output in Peer Cop Specific Output Step Action 1 Move the cursor to the REFERENCE column of the SPECIFIC OUTPUT field with the cursor arrow keys 2 In the REFERENCE column of the SPECIFIC OUTPUT field type the value 400016 Push lt Enter gt Result The cursor moves into the LEN column of the SPECIFIC OUTPUT field GoToNode AddNode Timeout OnError DelNode Fi F2 Y _F3 _F 4 __ 5 _ _ F6 _F PEER COP Timeout 566 ms Total Links Link Id 1 On Error CLEAR USED 1 OF 2666 WORDS Access to Node 1 MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT 400016 GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT E BIN Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 287 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Specifying References for Input and Output Data Continued Defining the Specific Output Step Action Continued 3 In the LEN column of the SPECIFIC OUTPUT field type the value 8 indicating that the M1 CPU at address 2 will
262. troduction This Section presents a brief overview of accessing the embedded web pages contained in the Momentum M1E 171 CCC 960 30 and 171 CCC 980 30 IEC modules The Momentum M1E 171 CCC 960 30 and 171 CCC 980 30 IEC modules Web pages enable you to access diagnostic information view configuration information and change the online configurations for the module What s in this This Section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Accessing the Web Utility Home Page 163 Momentum M1E Indicator 170 870 USE 101 10 V 2 162 Using the Ethernet Port Accessing the Web Utility Home Page Introduction How to Access It Each Momentum M1E 171 CCC 960 30 and 171 CCC 980 30 IEC PLC contains a World Wide Web embedded server that allows you to access diagnostics and online configurations for the controller Pages on the embedded web site display the Ethernet statistics for the node the controller s register values The web pages can be viewed across the World Wide Web using version 4 0 or greater of either Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer both of which support JDK 1 1 4 or higher For information on the additional functionality provided by the FactoryCast system in the Momentum M1E 171 CCC 960 30 and 171 CCC 980 30 IEC modules see the FactoryCast User s Guide For Quantum and Premium 890 USE 152 00 Before you can access the module s home page you must learn its full IP address or URL fr
263. u click on Peer Cop in the Cfg Ext menu the following screen appears Error Quit Utilit GoToNode AddNode Timeout On F 1 _F 2 _F3 ___F 4 _F5 _F6 PEER COP Timeout ms Total Links Link Id On Error USED 1 OF WORDS Access to Node MODE REFERENCE LEN TYPE INDEX SPECIFIC INPUT SPECIFIC OUTPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT fs GLOBAL INPUT fidd Node GLOBAL INPUT GLOBAL INPUT Link Node TO ALL NODES ON LINK GLOBAL OUTPUT The Peer Cop screen is divided into two regions by a horizontal rule At the top of the screen is a group of Peer Cop summary entries Timeout ON Error Total Links Access to Node The lower half of the screen displays the Peer Cop reference information i e the register or discrete references that the CPU uses to handle specific and global inputs outputs with other nodes on the network The Add Node popup menu appears near the bottom of the screen Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 261 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft The Default Peer Cop Screen Continued Next Step No values are set anywhere in the default Peer Cop screen The following two examples show how to set up Peer Cop to configure different types of Modbus Plus networks 262 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using Peer Cop with Modsoft Section 10 2 Using Modbus Plus to Handle I O
264. um components RJ45 Pinout The illustration below shows the pinouts for wiring an RJ45 connector for RS485 pin 1 Pin Function 1 RXD RXD TXD Reserved Signal common TXD Reserved Shield COlN OD oa AJ OIN Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 135 Using the Modbus Ports Pinouts for Modbus RS485 Networks Continued 9 Pin D Shell The illustration below shows the pinouts for wiring a male 9 pin D shell connector Pinout for RS485 The metal shell is connected to chassis ground pin 1 pin 9 Pin Function TXD RXD Signal common Reserved Reserved TXD RXD Reserved oloo NI OD Oo Ry Ww Reserved Continued on next page 136 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Using the Modbus Ports Pinouts for Modbus RS485 Networks Continued Master Communication Cable Interconnect Cables The illustration below shows the pinout for the 170 MCI 041 10 Modbus RS485 RJ45 RJ45 Master Communication Cable RJ45 Connector RXD RXD TXD TXD Not used Signal common Not used Shield lt M RJ45 Connector RXD RXD TXD TXD Not used Signal common Not used Shield The illustration below shows the pinout for the 170 MCI 02x xx Modbus Plus or Modbus RS485 Interconnect Cables 10 in 3 ft 10 ft and 30 ft RJ45 Connector RXD
265. uration parameters required to support an I O Map for I OBus I O Map Be sure that you have reserved enough words for I O mapping to support your I O Reserved Words Bus network The default setting is 144 words To estimate the number of words you require allow 16 words for overhead 10 words module on the network including both the local and the network I O Allot sufficient memory to completely I O Map your network while preserving as much user memory as possible for your application program Number of Be sure that the number of segments is set to 2 If you have changed this setting to Segments 1 you will not be able to support an I OBus network Next Step Once you are sure that your Configuration Overview parameters are set properly you can access an I O Map screen for an I OBus network 362 870 USE 101 10 V 2 I O Mapping an I OBus Network with Concept Accessing an I O Map Screen for an Il OBus Network Overview This section describes how to access an I O Map screen for an I OBus network using Concept 2 2 Procedure To access the I O Map screen for your I OBus network perform the steps in the following table Step Action 1 From the Configure menu select I OMap Result The I O Map dialog is displayed Click on the Insert button Result OBus is displayed as the Type for Drop 2 170 Map Expansion Size 144 Insert Delete Drop Type Holdup I
266. ure menu select PLC Type OR double click on the Type field in the dialog box Result The PLC Selection dialog box appears The default selection is Quantum PLC Selection QUANTUM PU 1130 140 CPU 113 025 140 CPU 113 02X 140 CPU 113 03 140 CPU 113 035 140 CPU 113 03X 140 CPU 113 04 om Continued on next page 312 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Selecting an M1 Processor Adapter Continued Procedure Continued Step Action 4 From the PLC Family dropdown menu select MOMENTUM Result The CPU Executive menu changes to reflect the choices available for Momentum PLC Selection Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 313 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Selecting an M1 Processor Adapter Continued Procedure Continued Step Action Choose your PLC type from the CPU Executive menu Result The remaining fields are filled with corresponding values PLC Family Ci PROC ADAPTER 512K ETHERNET 1 0 BUS CPU Executive Memory Size 171 CCC 780 10 984 171 CCC 780 10 41EC 171 CCC 960 20 984 171 CCC 980 20 984 171 CCS 700 10 171 CCS 700 780 00 171 CCS 760 00 984 IEC Runtime IEC Usable Memory Size on e Cancel Heip Click the lt OK gt button Result Your PLC type and default configuration parameters are displayed in the PLC Configuration screen 314
267. ure menu select Specials OR double click on any field in the Specials region of the dialog box Result The Specials dialog box appears Specials Continued on next page 328 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Reserving and Monitoring a Battery Coil Continued Reserving a Baitery Coil Continued Step Action 2 Click the check box next to Battery Coil Specials 3 Type a number from the range of available 0xxxx references in the box marked Ox Example If you have set the range of 0x s at 000001 001536 you might want to enter the reference value of the last coil 1536 Specials 4 Click the lt OK gt button Result The dialog box closes and the register you have specified is displayed on the PLC Configuration screen Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 329 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Reserving and Monitoring a Battery Coil Continued Monitoring the Monitor the battery coil in ladder logic or tie it to a lamp or alarm that will indicate Battery Coil when the battery is low Interpreting the The battery coil will always read either 0 or 1 Battery Coil Acoil state of 0 indicates that the battery is healthy Acoil state of 1 indicates that the battery should be changed 330 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Setting up the Time of Day Clock Overview Each Optio
268. us Plus Network in Concept With Peer COP wcccesescctccccecsesecccccseienenccnacsnaccseeceneecenecseanveesssaccenes 369 Section 14 1 Getting Started icici tte eh a eae ed ots 370 OVENVICW ETET EAEE TETEE T T 370 Accessing the Peer Cop Dialog BOX eecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeetieeeeaeenea 371 Adjusting the Amount of Extension Memory ssessseersesriierrissrrrerirerrinsrrrnerees 373 Other Default Settings in the Peer Cop Dialog BOX ssssssseseeseseesreeeresreerrenee 374 Section 14 2 Using Modbus Plus to Handle N O o eeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeenaees 376 OVENVICWS 3a tsk See acs pa ee tla OL el 376 Devices on the Network ceesceeeeseeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeseneeeseneeessaeeeennneeeeaaes 377 Changing the Peer Cop Summary Information eecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 378 Specifying References for Input Data ceceeecesseeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaes 380 xii 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Contents Section 14 3 Chapter 15 Part V Appendix A Appendix B Index Specifying References for Output Data 0 0 ee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeeeees 384 Passing Supervisory Data over Modbus PluS ccsssceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenreeees 387 OVEIWICW o cevsdheecseeceu le E nies eg E EEE EEEREN e ironies 387 Devices on the Network c cccesseecessceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeseeecerseeeeesseseseseneeenseetess 388 Specifying References for Input and Output Data 0 0 0 ee
269. user memory space 144 144 144 for the I O Map Memory allocated for None None None configuration extension 870 USE 101 10 V 2 317 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Changing the Range of Discrete and Register References Introduction This section provides guidelines and a procedure for changing the range of discrete Ox and 1x and register 8x and 4x references Guidelines When you change the range of discrete and register references follow these guidelines Adjust the range of discretes in increments of 16 Sixteen discretes consume one word Adjust the range of registers in increments of 1 Each register consumes one word The total number of register and discrete references cannot exceed the maximum of state memory displayed at the top of the dialog A minimum configuration of 16 Ox discretes 16 1x discretes one 3x register and one 4x register is required Continued on next page 318 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Changing the Range of Discrete and Register References Continued Procedure Follow the steps below to change the range of discrete and register references using the PLC Configuration screen Step Action 1 From the Configure menu select Memory Partitions OR double click on any field in the Ranges section of the dialog box Result The PLC Memory Partition dialog box appears showing the maximum memory size and
270. ush lt Enter gt Result A popup window appears in the top left corner of the screen displaying 16 baud values Me E aJ Al Default Bridge F3 _F 4 5_F 6 F f7 Lev 8 F8 0FF F9 PORTS Bridge Mode N Data Parity Stop Baud Head Slot Address Delay Protocol Bits Bits ASCII 7 ODD 1 10 ms RTU 8 EVEN 1 10 ms RS232 2 Use an arrow key to toggle the cursor onto the desired Baud selection in the popup window then push lt Enter gt Result The Port editor screen is updated with the Baud number you have specified and the cursor moves to the Head Slot column 238 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Changing the Modbus Address Overview Procedure Each port can be assigned a Modbus network address in the range 1 247 That address must be unique with respect to all other device addresses on the same Modbus networks Since Modbus Port 1 and Modbus Port 2 are always on different Modbus networks they can both be assigned the same address value without conflict The factory set default for both ports is address 1 From the Port editor screen perform the steps in the following table to change the Modbus Address Step Action 1 Place the cursor on the current Address entry for the Modbus port 2 Type a number in the range 1 247 Push lt Enter gt Result The Port editor screen is updated with the Address number you have typed and the curso
271. view of Momentum Option Adapters 65 Assembling Momentum Components 87 870 USE 101 10 V 2 17 Getting Started 18 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters At a Glance Purpose In This Chapter A Momentum M1 Processor Adapter can be snapped onto a Momentum I O base to create a central processing unit CPU that provides programmable logic control to local and distributed I O This chapter describes the M1 Processor Adapters This chapter contains the following sections For This Topic See Section On Page Introducing the M1 Processor Adapters 1 20 Features of Each Processor Adapter 2 28 870 USE 101 10 V 2 19 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters Section 1 1 Introducing the M1 Processor Adapters Overview Purpose A Momentum M1 Processor Adapter stores and executes the application program controlling the local I O points of its host I O base and distributed I O devices ona common communication bus This section describes the front panel components memory and performance characteristics of M1 Processor Adapters In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Front Panel illustration 21 Overview of Ports 22 Memory and Performance Characteristics 24 Power Supply 27 20 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Pr
272. w Purpose The communication parameters on the Modbus ports are set at the factory This section describes how to access the Port editor and how to edit the default parameters In This Section This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Accessing the Port Editor Screen 233 Parameters Which Should Not Be Changed 234 Changing the Mode and Data Bits 235 Changing Parity 237 Changing the Baud Rate 238 Changing the Modbus Address 239 Changing the Delay 240 Changing the Protocol on Modbus Port 2 241 232 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Accessing the Port Editor Screen Introduction How To Get There Port Editor Showing Default Values Two Sets of Parameters Modbus port parameters can be modified using the Port editor in Modsoft 2 6 This screen is accessed from the Configuration Overview editor To access the Port editor from the Configuration Overview editor move the cursor onto the Ports selection on the top menu bar then push lt Enter gt If you have not previously modified any port parameters the following screen will appear The screen shows the default parameters for two Modbus ports 01 and 02 If you have previously modified any communication port parameters the new values will appear in the screen Default Bridge 4 Qu F F Lev 8 F8 OFF F PORTS Bridge Mode N Number Mode Data Parity Stop Baud Head Slot Ad
273. wer to the module whenever you change the batteries Unless you save to flash if you change the batteries while the power is OFF you will have to reload your user logic program from the original files Battery maintenance should be performed only by qualified personnel according to Replacing the following illustration Batteries Monitor the Because a Momentum CPU assembly is designed to be installed in a cabinet Battery where it cannot be seen at all times no LED was created to monitor battery health We recommend that you reserve a battery coil in your programming panel software configuration and use it to monitor the health of your battery and report the need for replacement prior to battery failure refer to Reserving and Monitoring a Battery Coil on page 224 for Modsoft or Reserving and Monitoring a Battery Coil on page 328 for Concept 106 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Assembling Momentum Components Section 3 4 Labeling the CPU Guidelines for Labeling the CPU Overview A fill in label is shipped with each I O base This label should be placed on the M1 Processor Adapter that you mount on that base This section describes the label and provides an illustrated example Fill in Label A completed label provides information about the assembled module and its I O field devices that can be used by service and maintenance personnel The model number of the I O base is marked on the fill in label directly above the
274. words for every device entry in Peer Cop 128 words Specific input 2 words for every device entry in Peer Cop 128 words Continued on next page 324 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Establishing Configuration Extension Memory for Peer Cop Continued Procedure From the PLC Configuration screen follow the steps below to enable Peer Cop and adjust the amount of Configuration Extension memory Step Action 1 From the Configure menu select Config extensions OR double click anywhere in the Config Extensions region of the screen Result The Configuration Extension dialog box appears Configuration Extensions X ri TCP IP Ethernet 0 v Peer Cop Symax Ethernet 0 H M IEG Hot Standby MMS Ethernet o v J S84 Hot Standby Profibus DP 0 H Coresi ioe 2 Click the check box next to Peer Cop then click OK Result Peer Cop status changes from Disabled to Enabled in the PLC Configuration screen Config Extensions Data Protection Disabled Peer Cop Enabled Hot Standby Not Applicable Ethernet 0 Profibus DP Not Applicable Continued on next page 870 USE 101 10 V 2 325 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Establishing Configuration Extension Memory for Peer Cop Continued Procedure Continued Step Action 3 From the Configure menu select Peer Cop Result The Peer Cop dialog box appears
275. y Coil Oxxxx 0000901 001536 Timer Register 1xxxx 100001 100512 Time of Day Clock 3xxxx 300001 300048 Cfg Extension Used Size 4XXXX 400001 401872 4xxxx lt gt SFC Dupl Coils Start Oxxxx lt gt SFC 2 Enter a coil number in the range of available Oxxxx references Example If you have set the range of 0x s at 000001 001536 you might want to enter the reference value of the last coil 1536 3 Push lt Enter gt Continued on next page 224 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Reserving and Monitoring a Battery Coil Continued Monitoring the Monitor the battery coil in ladder logic or tie it to a lamp or alarm that will indicate Battery Coil when the battery is low Interpreting the The battery coil will always read either 0 or 1 Baitery Coil Acoil state of 0 indicates that the battery is healthy Acoil state of 1 indicates that the battery should be changed 870 USE 101 10 V 2 225 Configuring an M1 CPU with Modsoft Setting up the Time of Day Clock Overview Reserving Registers for the TOD Clock Each Option Adapter has a time of day clock To use this feature you must reserve a block of eight 4x registers This section describes how to reserve those registers using Modsoft 2 6 To reserve registers for the time of day clock perform the steps in the following table Step Action 1 From the Overview menu
276. y time 0 23 4x 6 Minute 0 59 4x 7 Second 0 59 334 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Reading the Time of Day Clock Overview This section uses an example to describe how to interpret the time of day clock registers Example If you reserved registers 400100 400107 as your TOD clock registers set the time bits and then read the clock at 9 25 30 on Thursday July 16 1998 the registers would display the following values Register Reading Indication 400100 0110000000000000 All clock values have been set clock values are being read 400101 5 decimal Thursday 400102 7 decimal July 400103 16 decimal 16 400104 98 decimal 1998 400105 9 decimal 9 a m 400106 25 decimal 25 minutes 40010 7 30 decimal 30 seconds 870 USE 101 10 V 2 335 Configuring an M1 CPU with Concept Section 12 3 Modifying Modbus Port Parameters Overview Purpose In This Section The communication parameters on the Modbus ports are set at the factory This section describes how to access the Modbus Port Settings dialog box and edit the default parameters This section contains the following topics For This Topic See Page Accessing the Modbus Port Settings Dialog Box 337 Changing the Baud Rate 338 Changing Mode and Data Bits 339 Stop Bit Should Not Be Changed 340 Changing
277. ycarbonate that can be damaged by strong alkaline solutions Altitude full operation 2000m 6500ft Vibration 10 57Hz 0 075mm displacement amplitude 57 150Hz 1g Ref IEC 68 2 6 FC Shock 15g peak 11ms half sine wave Ref IEC 68 2 27 EA RFI Susceptibility immunity Meets CE mark requirements for open equipment Open equipment should be installed in an industry standard enclosure with access restricted to qualified service personnel Storage Conditions Temperature 40 85 degrees C Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Safety Parameters Degree of protection Unintentional access UL 508 Type 1 NEMA250 Type 1 IP20 conforming to IEC529 Di electric strength RS232 and RS485 are non isolated from logic common Ground continuity 30 A test on the exposed metal connector Agency Approvals e UL508 CSA CUL CE e FMclass1 div2 46 870 USE 101 10 V 2 Overview of Momentum M1 Processor Adapters 171 CCC 960 20 Overview This section describes the 171 CCC 960 20 Processor Adapter including key features a illustration and specifications Key Features The key features of this Processor Adapter are Ethernet port 1 OBus port 544K bytes of internal memory 50 MHz clock speed cr Note The Ethernet port connector looks like a Modbus port connector Do not attempt to use an Ethernet adapter as a Modbus unit Do no

Schneider Electric Processor Adapter User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents